493592

Nec P420X Manual

217
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/222
Next page
Portable Projector
P420X/P350X/P350W
User’s Manual
Model No.
NP-P420X, NP-P350X, NP-P350W
5th edition, February 2012
• Macintosh,MacOSXandPowerBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista,InternetExplorer,.NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeitheraregistered
trademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.
• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.
• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMI
LicensingLLC.
• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandother
countriesandareas.
• Wi-Fi
®
,Wi-FiAlliance
®
,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)
®
areregisteredtrademarksoftheWi-FiAlli-
ance.
• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation
• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandother
countries.
• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarks
oftheirrespectiveholders.
• GPL/LGPLSoftwareLicenses
TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderGNUGeneralPublicLicense(GPL),GNULesserGeneralPublic
License(LGPL),andothers.
Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme.pdf”insidethe“aboutGPL&LGPL”folderonthesuppliedCD-
ROM.
NOTES
(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.
(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionable
points,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.
(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprotorothermattersdeemed
toresultfromusingtheProjector.
i
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
PleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.
CAUTION
Toturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.
Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasily
accessible.
CAUTION
TOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.
THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.
REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.
Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufcienttocauseelectrical
shock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.
Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthis
unithasbeenprovided.
Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.
WARNING: TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.
DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGS
CANBEFULLYINSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
ThisClass B digital apparatusmeetsallrequirementsofthe Canadian Interference-CausingEquipment Regula-
tions.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,
Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.
CAUTION
Avoiddisplayingstationaryimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.
DoingsocanresultintheseimagesbeingtemporarilysustainedonthesurfaceoftheLCDpanel.
Ifthisshouldhappen,continuetouseyourprojector.Thestaticbackgroundfrompreviousimageswill
disappear.
Disposing of your used product
EU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronic
productscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisin-
cludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessoriesorlamps.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,please
followtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.
Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpus
reducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpactsuchasmercurycontainedinalamptothehuman
healthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.
ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMember
States.
ii
Important Information
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCalifornia
tocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
TheFederalCommunicationsCommissiondoesnotallowanymodicationsorchangestotheunitEXCEPTthose
speciedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernmentregu-
lationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywith
thelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovide
reasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,and
canradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycause
harmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurina
particularinstallation.
Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedby
turningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthe
followingmeasures:
•Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
•Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.
•Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
•Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(veAmps)fuseinstalledforusewith
thisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.
Important Safeguards
Thesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventreandshock.Pleasereadthem
carefullyandheedallwarnings.
Installation
•Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:
-onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.
-nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.
-indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.
-inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.
-onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.
•Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:
-Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.
-Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
-Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.
-Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
iii
Important Information
Fire and Shock Precautions
• Ensurethatthereissufcientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyour
projector.Allowatleast4inches(10cm)ofspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.
• Donottrytotouchtheventilationoutletontheleftfront(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhile
theprojectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.Partsoftheprojectormaybecometem-
porarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduring
normalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieve
anyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyour
projector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbya
qualiedservicepersonnel.
• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.
• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorre.
• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupply
tsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.
• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.
• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthe
lensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancause
anunpredictableoutcomesuchasareorinjurytotheeyes.
WARNING
•Donotuseanyotherobjectthantheprojector’sslidinglenscovertocoverthelenswhiletheprojectorison.
Doingsocancausetheobjecttogetextremelyhot,andpossiblyresultinginareordamageduetotheheat
emittedfromthelightoutput.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
Thetiltangleoftheprojectorshouldnotexceed10degrees,norshouldtheprojectorbeinstalledinanywayother
thanthedesktopandceilingmount,otherwiselamplifecoulddecreasedramatically.
10°
iv
Important Information
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent.
Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheex-
haust.
• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorre.
- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.
- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.
- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.
- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.
- Donotheatthepowercord.
- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.
• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualiedservicepersonnelunder
thefollowingconditions:
- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.
- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.
- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.
- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.
- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.
• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.
• WhenusingaLANcable(onlymodelswiththeRJ-45LANport):
Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.
CAUTION
• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-
ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.
• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethe
softcasecouldbedamaged.
• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select
[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[HIGH].)
• Donottrytotouchtheventilationoutletontheleftfront(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhile
theprojectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.
• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblink-
ingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
v
Important Information
Note for US Residents
Thelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.
Lamp Replacement
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• Toreplacethelamp,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage147.
• Besuretoreplacethelampandlterwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE
LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER.]
appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphas
reachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelamp
case.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.
Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
Theprojectorhasahigh-pressuremercurylampasalightsource.
Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelampon
andoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.
CAUTION:
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroff
andthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glass
fragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.
About High Altitude mode
•
Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersor
higher.
Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesand
turnontheprojector.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcom-
ponentssuchasthelamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:
Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenue
suchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-
tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.
[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirecteldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreec-
tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirecteldofview.
vi
Important Information
Information on Wireless LAN:
Insomeareasandcountries,theP420X,P350X,andP350WseriesprojectorscomestandardwiththeUSBWireless
LANUnit.IfyoupurchasetheprojectormodelwithouttheWirelessLANUnit,theoptionalWirelessLANUnitmustbe
installedtousetheprojectorviaawirelessconnection.
Notethatuseinotherthansupportedcountriesandareasmayviolateradiowavelawsofthecountrywhereawire-
lessLANunitisused.UsethewirelessLANUnitaccordingtothecombinationsoftheproductnamesandsupported
countrieslistedonpageviii.
Certificate marks and codes of the NP02LM Series (English)
NP02LM1 Mexico CFTID:RCPNENP10-0740
Brazil
NP02LM2 Argentina CNCID:C-8400
Australia
NewZealand
N56
HongKong
HK0011000150
Vietnam
A0557240610AE01A2
FPT Distribution Co, Ltd.
A0557
-
240610
Indonesia
15809/POSTEL/2010
SouthAfrica
India 730/2010/WRLO
Singapore
Complies with
IDA Standards
DB00901
UAE
TRA
REGISTERED No:
ER0042849/10
DEALER No:
DA0038690/10
Pakistan
vii
Important Information
English Hereby,NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.declaresthatthisWirelessLANUnit(Model:NP02LM)
isincompliancewiththeessentialrequirementsandotherrelevantprovisionsofDirective
1999/5/EC.
Finnish
NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.vakuuttaatätenettäWirelessLANUnit(Model:NP02LM)tyyp-
pinenlaiteondirektiivin1999/5/EYoleellistenvaatimustenjasitäkoskeviendirektiivinmuiden
ehtojenmukainen.
German HiermiterklärtNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.,dasssichdieser/diese/diesesWirelessLANUnit
(Model:NP02LM)inÜbereinstimmungmitdengrundlegendenAnforderungenunddenanderen
relevantenVorschriftenderRichtlinie1999/5/EGbendet”.(BMWi)
HiermiterklärtNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.dieÜbereinstimmungdesGerätesWirelessLAN
Unit(Model:NP02LM)mitdengrundlegendenAnforderungenunddenanderenrelevanten
FestlegungenderRichtlinie1999/5/EG.(Wien)
French ParlapresenteNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.declarequel’appareilWirelessLANUnit(Model:
NP02LM)estconformeauxexigencesessentiellesetauxautresdispositionspertinentesde
ladirective1999/5/CE.
Parla presente,NEC DisplaySolutions,Ltd. declarequeceWireless LAN Unit (Model:
NP02LM)estconformeauxexigencesessentiellesetauxautresdispositionsdeladirective
1999/5/CEquiluisontapplicables.
Italian ConlapresenteNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.dichiarachequestoWirelessLANUnit(Model:
NP02LM)èconformeairequisitiessenzialiedallealtredisposizionipertinentistabilitedalla
direttiva1999/5/CE.
Spanish PormediodelapresenteNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.declaraqueelWirelessLANUnit(Model:
NP02LM)cumpleconlosrequisitosesencialesycualesquieraotrasdisposicionesaplicables
oexigiblesdelaDirectiva1999/5/CE.
Portuguese NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.declaraqueesteWirelessLANUnit(Model:NP02LM)estácon-
formecomosrequisitosessenciaiseoutrasdisposiçõesdaDirectiva1999/5/CE.
Swedish HärmedintygarNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.attdennaWirelessLANUnit(Model:NP02LM)
stårIöverensstämmelsemeddeväsentligaegenskapskravochövrigarelevantabestämmelser
somframgåravdirektiv1999/5/EG.
Dutch HierbijverklaartNEC DisplaySolutions,Ltd. dathet toestelWireless LAN Unit(Model:
NP02LM)inovereenstemmingismetdeessentiëleeisenendeandererelevantebepalingen
vanrichtlijn1999/5/EG.
BijdezeverklaartNECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.datdezeWirelessLANUnit(Model:NP02LM)
voldoetaandeessentiëleeisenenaandeoverigerelevantebepalingenvanRichtlijn1999/5/
EC.
Danish
Undertegnede NECDisplaySolutions, Ltd. erklærer herved, atfølgende udstyrWireless
LANUnit(Model:NP02LM)overholderdevæsentligekravogøvrigerelevantekravidirektiv
1999/5/EF.
Greek
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡOΥΣΑ NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ OΤΙ Wireless LAN Unit (Model:
NP02LM) ΣΥΜΜOΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡOΣ ΤΙΣ OΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛOΙΠΕΣ ΣXΕΤΙΚΕΣ
ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ OΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
viii
Important Information
Table of Supported Areas and Countries
Notethatusewithotherthanthecombinationsoftheproductnamesandsupportedcountriesandareaslistedbelow
mayviolateradiowavelawsofthecountrywherethedeviceisused.
ProductName Supportedcountriesandareas
NP02LM1 Brazil/Canada/Colombia/Mexico/Taiwan/UnitedStates
NP02LM2 Argentina/Australia/Austria/Belgium/Bulgaria/Chile/China/Cyprus/Czech/Denmark
/Ecuador/Egypt/Estonia/Finland/France/Germany/Greece/HongKong/Hungary/
Iceland/India/Indonesia/Ireland/Israel/Italy/Japan/Jordan/Kuwait/Latvia/Lebanon
/Liechtenstein/Lithuania/Luxembourg/Malta/NewZealand/Norway/Oman/Pakistan/
Peru/Philippines/Poland/Portugal/Qatar/Romania/SaudiArabia/Singapore/Slovak/
Slovenia/SouthAfrica/SouthKorea/Spain/SriLanka/Sweden/Switzerland/Thailand/
TheNetherlands/Turkey/Ukraine/UnitedArabEmirates/UnitedKingdom/Vietnam
NP02LM3 Russia
Cautions
• Cautions on Usage
Warning
• TheWirelessLANUnitisnotmeantforusewithfacilitiesorequipmentinvolvingthesafeguardofhumanlife,
suchasmedicalequipment,nuclearfacilitiesorequipment,aeronauticalorspaceequipment,transportation
facilitiesorequipment,etc.,orwithfacilitiesorequipmentrequiringhighlevelsofreliability.DonotusetheWire-
lessLANUnitinsuchcases.
• DonotusetheWirelessLANUnitnearcardiacpacemakers.
• DonotusetheWirelessLANUnitnearmedicalequipment.Doingsomaycauseelectromagneticinterference
withthemedicalequipment,possibleleadingtodeath.
• DonotdisassembleormodifytheWirelessLANUnitinanyway.Doingsocouldleadtoreorelectricshock.
• DonotusetheWirelessLANUnitinwetormoistplaces,suchasinbathroomsornearhumidiers.Doingso
couldleadtore,electricshockormalfunction.
Caution
Topreventdamageduetostaticelectricity,eliminateanystaticelectricityfromyourbodybeforetouchingtheWire-
lessLANUnit.
• StaticelectricityfromthehumanbodymaydamagetheWirelessLANUnit.BeforetouchingtheWirelessLAN
Unit,touchanaluminumsash,adoorknob,orsomeothermetalobjectaroundyoutoeliminatethestaticelec-
tricity.
Caution
TheradiowavesusedbytheWirelessLANUnitpassthroughthewoodorglassusedinnormalhomes(butnot
throughwindowpaneswithbuilt-inmetallicmesh).
Theradiowavesdonotpassthroughironreinforcingbars,metalorconcrete,however,sotheWirelessLANUnit
cannotbeusedforcommunicatingthroughwallsoroorsmadewiththesematerials.
ix
Important Information
• FCC Compliance
ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15oftheFCCRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:(1)this
devicemaynotcauseharmfulinterferenceand(2)thisdevicemustacceptanyinterferencereceived,including
interferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperation.
ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBPersonalComputerandPeripheral,
pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmful
interferenceinaresidentialinstallation.
Thisequipmentgenerates,usesandcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordance
withtheinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.
However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurinaparticularinstallation.Ifthisequipmentdoescause
harmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,
theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:
• Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
• Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.
• Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
• Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
ThisequipmenthasbeentestedtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBpersonalcomputerandperiph-eral,pursuantto
SubpartBofPart15ofFCCRules.Onlyperipherals(computerinput/outputdevices,terminals,printers,etc.)certied
(DoC)orveriedtocomplywithClassBlimitsmaybeattachedtothisequipment.Operationwithnon-certied(DoC)
ornon-veriedpersonalcomputerand/orperipheralsislikelytoresultinInterferencetoradioandTVreception.
TheconnectionofaunshieldedequipmentinterfacecabletothisequipmentwillinvalidatetheFCCCerticationof
thisdeviceandmaycauseinterferencelevelswhichExceedthelimitsestablishedbyFCCforequipment.
Youarecautionedthatchangesormodicationsnotexpresslyapprovedbythepartyresponsibleforcompliancecould
voidyourauthoritytooperatetheequipment.
Regulatory Information/Disclaimers
InstallationanduseofthisWirelessLANdevicemustbeinstrictaccordancewiththeinstructionsincludedinthe
userdocumentationprovidedwiththeproduct.Anychangesormodications(includingtheantennas)madetothis
devicethatarenotexpresslyapprovedbythemanufacturermayvoidtheuser’sauthoritytooperatetheequipment.
Themanufacturerisnotresponsibleforanyradioortelevisioninterferencecausedbyunauthorizedmodicationof
thisdevice,orthesubstitutionoftheconnectingcablesandequipmentotherthanmanufacturerspecied.Itisthe
responsibilityoftheusertocorrectanyinterferencecausedbysuchunauthorizedmodication,substitutionorattach-
ment.Manufactureranditsauthorizedresellersordistributorswillassumenoliabilityforanydamageorviolationof
governmentregulationsarisingfromfailingtocomplywiththeseguidelines.
IEEE802.11bor802.11goperationofthisproductintheU.S.A.isrmware-limitedtochannels1through11.
CAUTION
ThisequipmentcomplieswithFCCRFradiationexposurelimitssetforthforanuncontrolledenvironment.Thisdevice
anditsantennamustnotbeco-locatedoroperatinginconjunctionwithanyotherantennaortransmitter.
TocomplywithFCCRFexposurecompliancerequirements,theantennausedforthistransmittermustbeinstalled
toprovideaseparationdistanceofatleast7.87"/20cmfromallpersonsandmustnotbeco-locatedoroperatingin
conjunctionwithanyotherantennaortransmitter.
ThisClassBdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianRSS-210.
CetappareilnumeriquedelaClasseBestconformealanormeCNR-210duCanada.
Industry Canada Statement
ThisdevicecomplieswithRSS-210oftheIndustryCanadaRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwocondi-
tions:
1)thisdevicemaynotcauseinterferenceand
2)thisdevicemustacceptanyinterference,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperationofthedevice
x
Important Information
Regulatory Statement:
OperationofthisdeviceissubjectedtothefollowingNationalregulationsandmaybeprohibitedtouseifcertain
restrictionshouldbeapplied.
France:
Outdooruselimitedto10mWe.i.r.p.withintheband2454–2483.5MHz.DerogationinFrenchoverseasdepartments
ofGuyaneandLaReunion:outdoorusenotallowedinband2400-2420MHz.
• Cautions on security when using wireless LAN products
WithawirelessLAN,radiowavesareusedinsteadofLANcablesfortheexchangeofdatabetweenthewireless
accesspoints(computers,etc.),offeringtheadvantagethatLANconnectionscanbemadefreelywithintherange
oftheradiowaves.
Ontheotherhand,theradiowavesreachallpointswithinthisrange,regardlessofwallsorotherobstacles,possibly
resultingintheproblemsdescribedbelowifthepropersecuritymeasuresarenottaken.
• Contents of transmissions may be intercepted
Maliciousthirdpartiesmaypurposelyintercepttheradiowavesandstealinformationcontainedinthetransmissions,
includingsuchpersonalinformationasIDnumbers,passwords,creditcardnumbers,e-mailmessages,etc.
• Improper intrusions
Maliciousthirdpartiesmaywithoutpermissionaccessthepersonalorcompanynetworkandstealpersonalor
condentialinformation,pretendtobesomeoneelseandleakincorrectinformation,rewriteinformationthathas
beenintercepted,introducecomputervirusesorotherwisedamagedataorthesystem,etc.
WirelessLANcardsandwirelessaccesspointsgenerallyincludesecuritymeasuresfordealingwiththeseproblems.
Makingthepropersecuritysettingsbeforeusingtheproductscanreducetheriskofsuchproblemsarising.
Werecommendthatyoufullyunderstandtheproblemsthatcanarisewhenusingtheproductswithoutmakingthe
securitysettings,thenthatyoumakethesecuritysettingsbasedonyourowndecisionandatyourowndiscretion.
xi
Important Information
Specifications
(1) Specifications common to the NP02LM series
OperatingVoltage 5V(powersuppliedfromtheprojector)
MAXAmps 460mA
WirelessStandard IEEE802.11b/IEEE802.11g/IEEE802.11n
Modulation Method CCK/DQPSK/DBPSK/OFDM/DS-SS
LEDDisplay
(Green)
Duringcommunication:blinking
Standby:slowblinking
Nooperation:lightoff
Interface USB2.0(connectedtoUSBwirelessLANportontheprojector)
Dimensions Width:1.1"/28mm
Height:0.43"/11mm
Length:
3.03"/81mm(includingthecap)
Weight 0.049lbs/22g(includingthecap)
Environmental
Considerations
OperationalTemperatures:
41°to104°F/5°to40°C,20%to80%humidity
(non-condensing)
StorageTemperatures:
14°to122°F(-10°to50°C),20%to80%humidity
(non-condensing)
(2) Compliant standards according to model
NP02LM1
IEEE802.11b CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2462MHz
1to11channels
Transmissionmethod DS-SSmethod(directdispersionspectrumdispersion
method)
DataRates 11/5.5/2/1Mbps
IEEE802.11g CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2462MHz
1to11channels
Transmissionmethod OFDMmethod(OrthogonalFrequencyDivisionMultiplex-
ingmethod)
DataRates 54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6Mbps
IEEE802.11n CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2462MHz
1to11channels
Transmissionmethod OFDMmethod(OrthogonalFrequencyDivisionMultiplex-
ingmethod)/
MIMOmethod(Multiple-Input
Multiple-Outputmethod)
DataRates* Whendualchannelcommunicationisdisabled
130/117/104/78/52/39/26/19.5/13Mbps
Whendualchannelcommunicationisenabled
300/270/243/216/162/108/81/54/40.5/27/13.5Mbps
xii
Important Information
NP02LM2
IEEE802.11b CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2472MHz
1to13channels
Transmissionmethod DS-SSmethod(directdispersionspectrumdispersion
method)
DataRates 11/5.5/2/1Mbps
IEEE802.11g CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2472MHz
1to13channels
Transmissionmethod OFDMmethod(OrthogonalFrequencyDivisionMultiplex-
ingmethod)
DataRates 54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6Mbps
IEEE802.11n CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2472MHz
1to13channels
Transmissionmethod OFDMmethod(OrthogonalFrequencyDivisionMultiplex-
ingmethod)/
MIMOmethod(Multiple-Input
Multiple-Outputmethod)
DataRates* Whendualchannelcommunicationisdisabled
130/117/104/78/52/39/26/19.5/13Mbps
Whendualchannelcommunicationisenabled
300/270/243/216/162/108/81/54/40.5/27/13.5Mbps
NP02LM3
IEEE802.11b CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2472MHz
1to13channels
Transmissionmethod DS-SSmethod(directdispersionspectrumdispersion
method)
DataRates 11/5.5/2/1Mbps
IEEE802.11g CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
2412to2472MHz
1to13channels
Transmissionmethod OFDMmethod(OrthogonalFrequencyDivisionMultiplex-
ingmethod)
DataRates 54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6Mbps
IEEE802.11n CenterFrequencyRange/
Operatingchannels
Notavailable
Transmissionmethod Notavailable
DataRates Notavailable
* Dualchannelcommunicationwillbeautomaticallyswitchedbetween"enabled"and"disabled"accordingtothe
usageenvironment.
注意
依據　低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條　經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或
變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條　低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善
至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工
業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
xiii
Table of Contents
Important Information ............................................................................................i
1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1
1What’sintheBox? ......................................................................................................... 1
IntroductiontotheProjector .......................................................................................... 2
CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ................................................. 2
Featuresyou’llenjoy: ............................................................................................... 2
Aboutthisuser’smanual .......................................................................................... 3
PartNamesoftheProjector .......................................................................................... 4
Front/Top .................................................................................................................. 4
Rear ......................................................................................................................... 5
TopFeatures ............................................................................................................ 6
TerminalPanelFeatures .......................................................................................... 7
PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ............................................................................... 8
BatteryInstallation ................................................................................................... 9
RemoteControlPrecautions .................................................................................... 9
OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl ........................................................ 9
OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM ........................................ 10
OperatingEnvironment .......................................................................................... 11
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) .............................................. 12
1FlowofProjectinganImage ........................................................................................ 12
ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ............................................. 13
TurningontheProjector .............................................................................................. 14
NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) ...................................... 15
SelectingaSource ...................................................................................................... 16
Selectingthecomputerorvideosource................................................................. 16
AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ....................................................................... 17
Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) ............................ 18
Focus ..................................................................................................................... 19
Zoom ...................................................................................................................... 20
AdjusttheTiltFoot ................................................................................................. 21
CorrectingKeystoneDistortionManually .................................................................... 22
Adjustingwithbuttonsonthecabinet .................................................................... 22
Adjustingwiththeremotecontrol ........................................................................... 23
OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ................................................................. 24
AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust .................................................................. 24
TurningUporDownVolume ........................................................................................ 24
TurningofftheProjector .............................................................................................. 25
AfterUse...................................................................................................................... 26
3. Convenient Features ..................................................................................... 27
1TurningofftheImageandSound ................................................................................ 27
FreezingaPicture ....................................................................................................... 27
EnlargingaPicture ...................................................................................................... 27
ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingEcoMode[ECO
MODE] ................................................................................................................... 28
xiv
Table of Contents
CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ............................................. 29
PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ................................. 30
OperatingYourComputer’sMouseFunctionsfromtheProjector’sRemoteControl
viatheUSBCable(RemoteMouseFunction) ....................................................... 33
ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviatheUSBCable
(USBDisplay) ........................................................................................................ 34
ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ................................................. 36
ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviaaNetwork
[NETWORKPROJECTOR] .................................................................................... 43
UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputerviaaNetwork[REMOTE
DESKTOP] ............................................................................................................. 47
4. Using the Viewer ............................................................................................. 52
❶WhatyoucandowiththeViewer ................................................................................. 52
❷Preparingpresentationmaterials ................................................................................ 55
❸ProjectingimagesstoredinaUSBmemorydevice .................................................... 56
StartingtheViewer ................................................................................................. 56
ExitingtheViewer .................................................................................................. 59
NamesandfunctionsofViewerscreen .................................................................. 60
Vieweroptionsettings ............................................................................................ 65
❹Projectingdatafromsharedfolder .............................................................................. 68
Connectingtheprojectortothesharedfolder ....................................................... 68
Disconnectingthesharedfolderfromtheprojector ............................................... 71
❺Projectingdatafrommediaserver............................................................................... 72
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer 11 ...................................... 72
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer12 ...................................... 74
Connectingtheprojectortothemediaserver ........................................................ 75
Disconnectingtheprojectorfromthemediaserver ............................................... 76
❻Restrictionsondisplayingles .................................................................................... 77
SomerestrictionsonPowerPointles .................................................................... 77
SomerestrictionsonPDFles .............................................................................. 77
5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................................ 78
1UsingtheMenus .......................................................................................................... 78
MenuElements ............................................................................................................ 79
ListofMenuItems ....................................................................................................... 80
MenuDescriptions&Functions[SOURCE] ................................................................ 82
COMPUTER1and2 ............................................................................................. 82
HDMI ...................................................................................................................... 82
VIDEO .................................................................................................................... 82
S-VIDEO ................................................................................................................ 82
VIEWER ................................................................................................................. 82
NETWORK ............................................................................................................. 82
USBDISPLAY ........................................................................................................ 82
MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] .................................................................. 83
[PICTURE] ............................................................................................................. 83
[IMAGEOPTIONS] ................................................................................................ 86
[AUDIO] .................................................................................................................. 90
xv
Table of Contents
MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] .................................................................... 91
[GENERAL] ............................................................................................................ 91
[MENU] .................................................................................................................. 93
[INSTALLATION] .................................................................................................... 95
[OPTIONS(1)] ........................................................................................................ 97
[OPTIONS(2)] ........................................................................................................ 99
MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .................................................................... 101
[USAGETIME] ..................................................................................................... 101
[SOURCE]............................................................................................................ 102
[WIREDLAN] ....................................................................................................... 102
[WIRELESSLAN] ................................................................................................ 102
[VERSION(1)] ...................................................................................................... 103
[VERSION(2)] ...................................................................................................... 103
[OTHERS] ............................................................................................................ 103
MenuDescriptions&Functions[RESET] .................................................................. 104
ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ................................................................. 104
❾ApplicationMenu ....................................................................................................... 105
IMAGEEXPRESSUTILITY ................................................................................. 105
DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY ........................................................................... 105
NETWORKPROJECTOR .................................................................................... 106
REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION .................................................................. 106
NETWORKSETTINGS ........................................................................................ 107
TOOLS ................................................................................................................. 123
6. Installation and Connections ................................................................. 128
1SettingUptheScreenandtheProjector ................................................................... 128
SelectingaLocation............................................................................................. 128
ThrowDistanceandScreenSize ......................................................................... 130
MakingConnections .................................................................................................. 132
ConnectingYourComputer .................................................................................. 132
ConnectinganExternalMonitor .......................................................................... 134
ConnectingYourDVDPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .......................................... 135
ConnectingComponentInput .............................................................................. 136
ConnectingHDMIInput........................................................................................ 137
ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ................................................................................. 138
ConnectingtoaWirelessLAN(NP02LMseries) ................................................. 139
AttachingtheOptionalCableCover(NP01CV) ................................................... 142
7. Maintenance .................................................................................................... 143
1CleaningtheFilters.................................................................................................... 143
CleaningtheLens...................................................................................................... 146
CleaningtheCabinet ................................................................................................. 146
ReplacingtheLampandtheFilters ........................................................................... 147
8. User Supportware ......................................................................................... 152
InstallingSoftwareProgram ...................................................................................... 152
InstallationforWindowssoftware ......................................................................... 152
InstallationforMacintoshsoftware ....................................................................... 154
UsingtheComputerCable(VGA)toOperatetheProjector(VirtualRemoteTool) ... 155
xvi
Table of Contents
ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectoroveraLAN(Image
ExpressUtilityLite) .............................................................................................. 160
ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolinImageExpress
UtilityLite) ............................................................................................................ 163
WhatyoucandowithGCT .................................................................................. 163
ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GCT) ........................................................... 163
ProjectingImagesorVideosfromtheProjectoroveraLAN(ImageExpressUtility
2.0) ....................................................................................................................... 165
WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2.0 .................................................. 165
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 166
BasicOperationofImageExpressUtility2.0 ....................................................... 167
UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputeroveraLAN(DesktopControlUtility
1.0) ....................................................................................................................... 176
WhatyoucandowithDesktopControlUtility1.0 ................................................ 176
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 176
Usingtheprojectortooperateyourcomputer’sdesktopscreen .......................... 177
ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4) ................................. 185
ConvertingPowerPointlestoSlides(ViewerPPTConverter3.0) ........................... 186
ProjectingYourMac’sScreenImagefromtheProjectoroveraLAN(Image
ExpressUtility2forMac) ..................................................................................... 188
WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2 ..................................................... 188
Operatingenvironment ........................................................................................ 188
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 188
UsingImageExpressUtility2 .............................................................................. 189
9. Appendix ............................................................................................................. 192
1Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 192
IndicatorMessages .............................................................................................. 192
CommonProblems&Solutions ........................................................................... 193
Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. .............................. 194
Specications ............................................................................................................ 195
CabinetDimensions .................................................................................................. 197
PinAssignmentsofD-SubCOMPUTERInputConnector ........................................ 198
CompatibleInputSignalList ...................................................................................... 199
PCControlCodesandCableConnection ................................................................. 200
TroubleshootingCheckList ........................................................................................ 201
TravelCareGuide ....................................................................................................... 203
1
Projector
1. Introduction
1 What’s in the Box?
Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.
Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.
Power cord
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
Computer cable (VGA)
(7N520073)
NEC Projector CD-ROM
User’s manual (PDF) and the utility
software
(7N951555)
For North America only
Registrationcard
Limitedwarranty
For customers in Europe:
YouwillndourcurrentvalidGuar-
anteePolicyonourWebSite:
www.nec-display-solutions.com
Insome areas andcountries, the projectorcomes
standardwiththeUSBWirelessLANUnit.Ifyoupur-
chasetheprojectormodelwithouttheWirelessLAN
Unit,theoptionalWirelessLANUnitmustbeinstalled
tousetheprojectorviaawirelessconnection.
• ImportantInfomation(ForNorthAmerica:
7N8N1261) (For Other countries than North
America: 7N8N1261 and 7N8N1272)
• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorthAmerica:
7N8N1281) (For Other countries than North
America: 7N8N1281 and 7N8N1291)
Remote control
(7N900922)
Batteries (AAA × 2)
Unlessotherwisedescribedintheuser’smanual,thedrawingsfortheprojectorcabinetshowexamplesoftheP420X.
2
1. Introduction
Introduction to the Projector
Thissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector
Thisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimages
upto300inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMacintoshcomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,
DVDplayer,ordocumentcamera.
Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,
andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*
1
.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.
*
1
Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.
 Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
 Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
Features you’ll enjoy:
• Quick start (3 seconds*
1
), Quick Power Off (0 seconds), Direct Power Off
3seconds*
1
afterturningonthepower,theprojectorisreadytodisplayPCorvideoimages.
Theprojectorcanbeputawayimmediatelyaftertheprojectorispowereddown.Nocooldownperiodisrequired
aftertheprojectoristurnedofffromtheremotecontrolorcabinetcontrolpanel.
Theprojectorhasafeaturecalled“DirectPowerOff”.Thisfeatureallowstheprojectortobeturnedoff(evenwhen
projectinganimage)byusingtheMainPowerSwitchordisconnectingtheACpowersupply.
ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,useapowerstripequippedwithaswitchand
abreaker.
*1Thequickstarttimeisonlywhen[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL]intheon-screenmessage.
• 0.2 W (100-130 V AC)/0.4 W (200-240 V AC) in standby condition with energy saving technology
Selecting[POWER-SAVING]for[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenucanputtheprojectorinpower-savingmode
thatconsumesonly0.2W(100-130VAC)/0.4W(200-240VAC).
• Carbon Meter
Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO
2
emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECO
MODE]issetto[AUTOECO]or[ECO1].
TheamountofCO
2
emissionreductionwillbedisplayedintheconrmationmessageatthetimeofpower-offand
intheINFOoftheon-screenmenu.
• Lamp life up to 5000 hours (P350X)/3500 hours (P420X/P350W) without cleaning the lters regularly
UsinginEcoModeallowsyoutoprolongtheprojector’slamplifeupto5000hours(upto4000hoursinNORMAL
Mode(ECOModeOFF)).
ForP420XandP350W:
UsinginEcoModeallowsyoutoprolongtheprojector’slamplifeupto3500hours(upto3000hoursinNORMAL
Mode(ECOModeOFF))
Thetwo-layer,largeltersrequirenoregularcleaning.Filterreplacementisrequredonlywhenlampreplacement
isdone.
• Vertical lens shift mechanism offers installation exibility
Manuallensshiftthatcanbeadjustedbyturningdialsonthetopoftheprojector.
• HDMI input port provides digital signal
TheHDMIinputprovidesHDCPcompatibledigitalsignals.TheHDMIinputalsosupportsaudiosignal.
3
1. Introduction
• 10 W built-in speaker for an integrated audio solution
Powerful10wattmonauralspeakerprovidesvolumeneedforlargerooms.
• The supplied remote control allows you to assign a CONTROL ID to the projector
Multipleprojectorscanbeoperatedseparatelyandindependentlywiththesamesingleremotecontrolbyassigning
anIDnumbertoeachprojector.
• Vertical keystone correction
Keystonefeatureallowstheprojectortocorrectverticaldistortion.
• USB Display
UsingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB2.0specications)toconnectthecomputerwith
theprojectorallowsyoutosendyourcomputerscreenimagetotheprojectorwithouttheneedofatraditional
computercable(VGA).
• Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capability along with wireless networking capabilities
AnRJ-45connectorisstandard.AwirelessLANunitisequippedwiththeprojectorformodelsdistributedinNorth
Americamodels.AnoptionalwirelessLANunitisavailableformodelsforEurope,Australia,Asiaandothercoun-
triesthanNorthAmerica.
• Software programs (User Supportware) contained in the supplied CD-ROM
ThesuppliedNECProjectorincludessevenprograms:VirtualRemoteTool,ImageExpressUtilityLite,Image
ExpressUtility2.0,DesktopControlUtility1.0,PCControlUtilityPro4,ViewerPPTConverter3.0,andImage
ExpressUtility2forMac.
• LAN-compatible Viewer
Theprojector’sbuilt-inViewerallowsyoutoviewimagesormovielesinthesharedfolderofyourPCconnected
toawiredorwirelessLAN.
*TheViewersupportstheMediaSharingfunctionofWindowsMediaPlayer11.
• AUTO POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF features
TheAUTOPOWERON(AC),AUTOPOWERON(COMP1),AUTOPOWEROFF,andOFFTIMERfeatureseliminate
theneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
• Preventing unauthorized use of the projector
Enhancedsmartsecuritysettingsforkeywordprotection,cabinetcontrolpanellock,securityslot,andsecurity
chainopeningtohelppreventunauthorizedaccess,adjustmentsandtheftdeterrence.
• High resolution up to UXGA
Highresolutiondisplay-uptoUXGAcompatible,XGA(P420X/P350X)/WXGA(P350W)nativeresolution.
• CRESTRON ROOMVIEW supported
TheprojectorsupporsCRESTRONROOMVIEWwhichallowsyoutocontrolandmanageequipmentconnected
toyournetworkfromyourcomputer.
About this user’s manual
Thefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthersttime.Takeafewminutesnowto
reviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llnd
anoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.
4
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Controls
(→ page 6)
Lens Shift Dial (Vertical)
(→ page 18)
Lens
Remote Sensor
(→ page 9)
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter Cover
(→ page 143, 150)
Zoom Lever
(→ page 20)
Lens Cover
Focus Lever
(→ page 19)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(→ page 21)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(→ page 21)
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is exhausted from here.
5
1. Introduction
Opening and closing the lens cover
Slidethelenscovertothelefttouncoverthelens.
Tocoverthelens,slidethelenscovertotheright.
NOTE:
• ThelenscoverworksinconjunctionwiththeAVmutefunction.Closingthelenscoverwillturnofftheimageandsoundduring
normalprojectoroperation;openingitwillrestoretheimageandsound.
Withthelenscoverclosedtheimageandsoundisturnedoff,howeverthelampisstilllit.Iftheprojectorstaysthiswayforabout
2hours,itwillturnoffautomatically.
• Donotpullthelenscoverwithexcessiveforceorapplystrongpressureineithertheupordowndirection.Doingsocancause
damagetothelenscoverslidingmechanism!
Port Cover for
USB Wireless LAN Unit
When using the USB Wireless LAN
Unit, first remove the cover. (→
page 141)
Terminal Panel (→ page 7)
MonauralSpeaker(10W)
Lamp Cover (→ page 148)
Rear
Remote Sensor
(→ page 9)
AC Input
Connect the supplied power cord’s
three-pin plug here, and plug the
other end into an active wall outlet.
(→ page 13)
* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver
®
SecuritySystem.
Rear Foot (→ page 21)
Security chain opening
Attach an anti-theft device.
The security chain opening accepts
security wires or chains up to 0.18
inch/4.6 mm in diameter.
Built-in Security Slot (
)*
Cable cover connection (right and
left)
Screw holes and grooves for the
optional cable cover
6
1. Introduction
Top Features
1. (POWER) Button (→page14, 25)
2. POWER Indicator (→page13, 14, 25, 192)
3. STATUS Indicator (→page192)
4. LAMP Indicator (→page147, 192)
5. ECO Button (→page28)
6. SOURCE Button (→page16)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button (→page24)
8. MENU Button (→page78)
9.  / Volume Buttons  / Keystone Buttons
 (→
page22, 24)
10. ENTER Button (→page78)
11. EXIT Button (→page78)
7
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
1235613 12
87
11 14910
4
1. COMPUTER 1 IN/ Component Input Connector
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)(→page132, 136, 157)
2. COMPUTER 1 AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
(→
page132, 134, 136)
3. COMPUTER 2 IN / Component Input Connector
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→page132, 136)
4. COMPUTER 2 AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
(→
page132, 134, 136)
5. HDMI IN Connector (Type A)
(→
page132, 137)
6. USB (PC) Port (Type B)
(→
page33, 34, 132)
7. MONITOR OUT (COMP. 1) Connector (Mini D-Sub
15 Pin) (→page134)
8. AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)(→page134)
9. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
(→page135)
10. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA)(→page135)
11. VIDEO/S-VIDEO AUDIO IN L/MONO, R (RCA)
(→
page135)
12. LAN Port (RJ-45)(→page141)
13. USB Port (Type A)(→page59, 180)
14. PC CONTROL [PC CONTROL] Port (D-Sub 9 Pin)
(→
page200)
UsethisporttoconnectaPCorcontrolsystem.This
enablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommu-
nicationprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,
typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage200.
8
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Remote Control
3
7
5
6
1
2
10
15
16
14
17
9
4
8
13
29
30
31
19
20
25
27
28
24
18
23
22
21
26
32
12
11
1. Infrared Transmitter
(→page9)
2. POWER ON Button
(→page14)
3. POWER OFF Button
(→page25)
4, 5, 6. COMPUTER 1/2/3 Button
(→
page16)
(COMPUTER3buttonisnotavailable.)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button
(→page24)
8. VIDEO Button
(→page16)
9. S-VIDEO Button
(→page16)
10. HDMI Button (→page16)
11. VIEWER Button (→page16, 56)
12. NETWORK Button (→page16)
13. USB DISPLAY Button (→page16)
14. ID SET Button
(→page96)
15. Numeric Keypad Button/CLEAR Button
(→page96)
16. FREEZE Button
(→page27)
17. AV-MUTE Button
(→page27)
18. MENU Button
(→page78)
19. EXIT Button (→page78)
20.  Button (→page78)
21. ENTER Button (→page78)
22. D-ZOOM (+)(–) Button
(→page27)
23. MOUSE L-CLICK Button*
(→page33)
24. MOUSE R-CLICK Button*
(→page33)
25. PAGE / Button*
(→
page33)
26. ECO Button (→page28)
27. KEYSTONE Button
(→page23)
28. PICTURE Button
(→page83, 85)
29. VOL. (+)(–) Button
(→page24)
30. ASPECT Button
(→page88)
31. FOCUS/ZOOM Button
(notavailableonthisseriesofprojectors)
32. HELP Button
(→page101)
* ThePAGE/, ,MOUSEL-CLICKandMOUSER-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnected
withyourcomputer..
9
1. Introduction
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
1
Pressrmlyandslidethebattery
coveroff.
2
Installnewbatteries(AAA).Ensure
thatyouhavethebatteries’polarity
(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabout22feet/7mandwithina60-degreeangleof
theremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.
• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfalls
onthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.
Battery Installation
3
Slipthecoverbackoverthebat-
teriesuntilitsnapsintoplace.Do
notmixdifferenttypesofbatteries
ornewandoldbatteries.
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
OPEN
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
7 m/22 feet
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
OPEN
Remote control
10
1. Introduction
Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROM
NamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms
Nameofsoftwareprogram Features
VirtualRemoteTool ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsourceselec-
tionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputerbyusingthesuppliedcomputercable
(VGA)anditisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthe
logodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventit
fromchanging.(→page155)
ImageExpressUtilityLite • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtoprojectyourcomputer’sscreenoverthe
USBcableorthewired/wirelessnetwork.Thecomputercable(VGA)isnot
required.(→page34,page160)
• ThissoftwareprogramcanbeusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsource
selectionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputer.
• TheGeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)functionallowsyoutocorrectdistortion
ofimagesprojectedonacurvedwall.(→page163)
ImageExpressUtility2.0 • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendthescreensofyourpersonalcomput-
erstotheprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN(Meetingmode).
Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtopersonalcomputers.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandsavedto
thepersonalcomputers.Imagescanbesentfromapersonalcomputerto
notonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.
(→page165)
DesktopControlUtility1.0 • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatethedesktopscreenofapersonal
computerataremotelocationbyusingaprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN.
(→page176)
PCControlUtilityPro4 Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojectorfromthecomputerwhen
thecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN(wiredorwireless)or
aserialcable.(→page185)
ViewerPPTConverter3.0 ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtoconvertlescreatedwithPowerPointinto
JPEGlesthatcanbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwhen
aUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheprojector.(→page186)
ImageExpressUtilityforMac • ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojec-
toroveranetwork(wiredorwirelessLAN).(→page188)ForMac’soperating
environment,seepage188.
NOTE:
• ImageExpressUtilityLitedoesnotsupport“MeetingMode”inImageExpressUtility2.0andImageExpressUtility2forMac
includedwithourothermodels.
Download service
Fortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:
URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
11
1. Introduction
Operating Environment
ThefollowingistheoperatingenvironmentforImageExpressUtilityLite.Fortheoperatingenvironmentofothersoft-
wareprogram,refertothehelpfunctionofeachsoftwareprogram.
SupportedOS Windows7HomeBasic
Windows7HomePremium
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomeBasic
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
WindowsXPHomeEditionServicePack3orlater
WindowsXPProfessionalServicePack3orlater
• Only32-bitversion
• Windowspower-savingfunctionisnotsupported.
Processor • Windows7/WindowsVista
PentiumM1.2GHzequivalentorhigherrequired
Dualcore1.5GHzorhigherrecommended
• WindowsXP
PentiumM1.0GHzequivalentorhigherrequired
Dualcore1.0GHzorhigherrecommended
Memory • Windows7/WindowsVista
512MBormorerequired
1GBormorerecommended
• WindowsXP
256MBormorerequired
512MBormorerecommended
*Morememorymayberequiredtorunadditionalapplicationssimultaneously.
Graphicprocessor • Windows7/WindowsVista
The“Graphics”score3.0ormoreof“WindowsExperienceIndex”recommended.
Networkenvironment TCP/IP-compatiblewiredLANorwirelessLAN
(*UseawirelessLANunitcomplyingwiththeWi-Fistandard.)
Resolution • Windows7/WindowsVista
SVGA(800×600)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
• WindowsXP
VGA(640×480)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
1024dots×768lines-1280dots×800linesrecommended(P350W)
ScreenColors HighColor(15bits,16bits)
TrueColor(24bits,32bits)(recommended)
• 256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.
12
Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.
1 Flow of Projecting an Image
Step 1
• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→page13)
Step 2
• Turningontheprojector(→page14)
Step 3
• Selectingasource(→page16)
Step 4
• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→page17)
• Correctingkeystonedistortion[KEYSTONE](→page22)
Step 5
• Adjustingapictureandsound
- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 24)
- Turning up or down volume (→ page 24)
Step 6
• Makingapresentation
Step 7
• Turningofftheprojector(→page25)
Step 8
• Afteruse(→page26)
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
13
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord
1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.
This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “6.
Installation and Connections” on page 132.
Connect the computer cable (VGA) between the projector’s COMPUTER 1 IN connector and the computer’s port
(mini D-Sub 15 Pin). Turn two thumb screws of both connectors to fix the computer cable (VGA).
2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.
First connect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other
plug of the supplied power cord in the wall outlet.
The projector’s power indicator will flash for a few seconds and then will light orange* (standby mode).
The STATUS indicator will also light green*.
* This will apply for both indicators when [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]. See the Power Indicator
section.(→ page 192)
COMPUTER 1 IN
Makesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedinto
both the AC IN and the wall outlet.
To wall outlet ←
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
14
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Standby Blinking PowerOn
Steady orange light Blinking blue light Steady blue light
Turning on the Projector
1. Slidethelenscovertothelefttouncoverthelens.
2. Pressthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinet
orthePOWERONbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The POWER indicator will turn to blue and the projector
will become ready to use.
TIP:
• Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOUR
PASSWORD.” is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY]
featureisturnedon.(→page30)
• When the ECO message is displayed, it means that [ON] is
selectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→page94)
• PressingbuttonssuchaspowerbuttonandMENUbuttonwill
makesound.Toturnoffthebeepsound,select[OFF]for[BEEP]
fromthemenu.(→page98)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer
or video source is turned on and that the lens cover is
open.
NOTE:Whennoinputsignalispresent,theno-signalguidanceis
displayed(factorymenusetting).
(→page192)
15
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
Whenyourstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectone
ofthe27menulanguages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Usethe, , or buttontoselectoneofthe27
languagesfromthemenu.
2. PresstheENTERbuttontoexecutetheselection.
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu
operation.
Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.
(→[LANGUAGE]onpage80 and 93)
NOTE:
• Whenturningoffthepowersupplyandthenbackonbyusingapowerstriporbreaker.
Allowaminimumof1secondbetweenturningoffthemainpowersupplyandturningitbackonagain.
Failingtodosocouldresultinnopowertotheprojector.(Therewillbenostand-byLED)
Shouldthishappen,unplugthepowercordandplugitinagain.Turnonthemainpower.
• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
• Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditionthe
projectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocool
down.
• Whenthelampreachesitsendofusablelife,theprojectorwillnotturnon.Ifthishappens,replacethelamp.
• IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.
Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→page95)
• Ifthelampfailstolight,andiftheSTATUSindicatorashesonandoffinacycleofsixtimes,waitafullminuteandthenturnon
thepower.
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.
• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis
stabilized.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.
• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-
inganimageforsometimeandthentheprojectorwilldisplaytheimage.
16
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.
Detecting the Signal Automatically
PresstheSOURCEbuttononce.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailable
inputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:
COMPUTER1→ COMPUTER2 → HDMI →VIDEO →S-VIDEO →
VIEWER→USBDISPLAY→COMPUTER1→ ...
• WiththeSOURCEscreendisplayed,youcanpresstheSOURCE
buttonafewtimestoselecttheinputsource.
TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.
Using the Remote Control
PressanyoneoftheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,HDMI,VIDEO,S-
VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORK,orUSBDISPLAYbuttons.
Selecting Default Source
Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayed
eachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthebuttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe but-
tonortheENTERbuttontoselect[GENERAL].
3.
Pressthe
buttonthreetimestoselect[OPTIONS(2)].
4. Pressthebuttonsixtimestoselect[DEFAULTSOURCESE-
LECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.
(→ page 100)
5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbut-
ton.
6. PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimestoclosethemenu.
7. Restarttheprojector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[NETWORK]willnotbeautomatically
selected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[NETWORK].
TIP:
• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfroma
computerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INinputwillpowerontheprojector
andsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
([AUTOPOWERON(COMP1)]→page100)
• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallows
youtosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.
17
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Usethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomleverandthefocuslevertoadjustthepicturesizeand
position.
In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.
Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage
[Lensshift]
Adjustingthefocus
[Focuslever]
Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage
[Zoomlever]
Adjustingthethrowangle(theheightofanimage)
[Tiltfoot]*¹
Adjustingtheleftandrighttiltofanimage
[Rearfoot]
Adjustingthekeystonecorrection
[Keystone]
NOTE*1:Adjustthethrowangle(theheightofanimage)whentheimagepositionishigherthanthelensshiftadjustablerange.
(→ page 18)
(→ page 20)
(→ page 21)
(→ page 19)
(→ page 21)
(→ page 22)
18
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)
Rotatethelensshiftdial.
Inthisuser’smanual,theupwardmaximumshiftisreferredtoas“normalposition”.
NOTE:
Thelensshiftdialcannotberotatedbeyondthemaximumupwardordownwardshift.Forciblyrotatingmaycausedamagetothe
projector.
TIP:
Lensshiftcanbeadjustedwiththerangebelow.Ifyouwishtomoveuptheimagehigherthanthislimit,usethetiltfootofthe
projector.
Desktop front projection
[P420X/P350X]
[P350W]
Downward
Upward
Lens shift dial
Height of projected
image
Height of projected
image
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.5V)
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.6V)
19
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Ceiling front projection
[P420X/P350X]
[P350W]
Focus
UsetheFOCUSlevertoobtainthebestfocus.
Height of projected
image
Height of projected
image
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.5V)
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.6V)
Focus Lever
20
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Zoom
UsetheZOOMlevertoadjusttheimagesizeonthescreen.
Zoom Lever
21
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
2
1
3
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
Adjust the Tilt Foot
1.Liftthefrontedgeoftheprojector.
CAUTION:
DonottrytotouchtheventilationoutletduringTiltFootadjustment
asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoristurnedonandafterit
isturnedoff.
2.PushupandholdtheAdjustableTiltFootLeveronthefrontof
theprojectortoextendtheadjustabletiltfoot.
3.Lowerthefrontoftheprojectortothedesiredheight.
4.ReleasetheAdjustableTiltFootLevertolocktheAdjustabletilt
foot.
The tilt foot can be extended up to 1.6 inch/40 mm.
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of
the projector.
Rotate the rear foot to the desired height in order to square the image
on the projection surface.
CAUTION:
• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.
Misusessuchasusingthetiltfoottocarryorhang(fromthewallor
ceiling)theprojectorcancausedamagetotheprojector.
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image [Rear foot]
• Rotatetherearfoot.
The rear foot can be extended up to 0.5 inch/12 mm. Rotating the rear
foot allows the projector to be placed horizontally.
NOTE:
• Donotextendtherearfootbeyonditsheightlimit(0.5inch/12mm).Doingso
maycausetherearfoottocomeoutoftheprojector.
Rear foot
Up Down
22
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Correcting Keystone Distortion Manually
Ifthescreenistiltedvertically,keystonedistortionbecomeslarge.Tocorrectkeystonedistortionmanually,proceed
withthefollowingstepstocorrectkeystonedistortion.
NOTE:
• Themaximumrangeofverticalkeystonecorrectionis+/−30degrees.
• TheKeystonecorrectioncancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.
• TheKeystonecorrectionrangecanbemadenarrower,dependingonasignaloritsaspectratioselection.
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet
1. Pressthe or buttonwithnomenusdisplayed.
 Thekeystonebarwillbedisplayed.
2. Usethe or tocorrectthekeystonedistortion.
3. PresstheENTERbutton.
 Thekeystonebarwillbeclosed.
NOTE:
• Whenthemenuisdisplayed,theaboveoperationisnotavailable.Whenthemenuisdisplayed,presstheMENUbuttontoclose
themenuandstarttheKeystonecorrection.
Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[GENERAL]→[KEYSTONE].Thechangescanbesavedwith[KEYSTONESAVE].(→page
91)
• KeystonecontrolisnotavailablewiththeorbuttonwhenVIEWERorNETWORKisused.
23
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting with the remote control
1. PresstheKEYSTONEbutton.
The Keystone bar will be displayed.
2. Usethe or buttontocorrectthekeystonedistortion.
Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel.
3. PresstheEXITbutton.
The Keystone bar will be closed.
24
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizingacomputerimageautomatically.(COMPUTER1/COMPUTER2)
PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.
Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthersttime.
[Poor picture]
[Normal picture]
NOTE:
Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.
• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]
manually.(→page86,87)
Turning Up or Down Volume
Soundlevelfromthespeakercanbeadjusted.
TIP:Whennomenusappear,theandbuttonsontheprojectorcabinetwork
asavolumecontrol.
NOTE:
• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththeorbuttonwhenanimageisenlarged
byusingtheD-ZOOM(+)buttonorwhenthemenuisdisplayed.
• VolumecontrolisnotavailablewiththeorbuttonwhenVIEWERorNET-
WORKisused.
TIP:
• The[BEEP]soundvolumecannotbeadjusted.Toturnoffthe[BEEP]sound,
fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[BEEP]→[OFF].
• Volumecanbecontrolledfromthemenu([ADJUST]→[AUDIO])
Increase volume
Decrease volume
25
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:
1. First, press the (POWER)buttonon the projector
cabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecon-
trol.
The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE ? / CARBON SAV-
INGS- SESSION 0.000[g-CO2]] message will appear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the
(POWER)orthePOWEROFFbuttonagain.
The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will
light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
PowerOn
Steady blue light
Standby
Steady
orange light
Press twice
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
NOTE:
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.
• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.
• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosing
themenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.
26
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1. Unplugthepowercord.
2. Disconnectanyothercables.
• RemovetheUSBmemoryifitisinsertedintotheprojector.
3. Retractadjustabletiltfootifextended.
4. Slidethelenscovertotherighttocoverthelens.
27
1 Turning off the Image and Sound
PresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageandsoundforashort
periodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimageandsound.
Theprojector’spower-savingfunctionwillwork10secondsaftertheimage
isturnedoff.Asaresult,thelamppowerwillbereduced.
NOTE:
•
Eventhoughtheimageisturnedoff,themenustillremainsonthescreen.
• SoundfromtheAUDIOOUTjack(Stereomini)canbeturnedoff.
• Torestoretheimage,evenifyoupresstheAV-MUTEbuttonimmediatelyafter
thestartofthepower-savingfunction,thelampbrightnessmaynotberestored
toitsoriginallevel.
Freezing a Picture
PresstheFREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresume
motion.
NOTE:Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingback.
Enlarging a Picture
Youcanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.
NOTE:Themaximummagnicationmaybelessthanfourtimesdependingon
thesignal.
Todoso:
1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.
To move the magnified image, use the ,,or button.
3. Convenient Features
28
3. Convenient Features
Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using Eco
Mode [ECO MODE]
TheECOMODE(ECO1)increaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownonCO
2
emis-
sions.
Threebrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF],[AUTOECO],and[ECO1]modes.
[ECOMODE] Description StatusofLAMPindicator
[OFF] Thisisthedefaultsetting(100%Brightness). Off
[AUTOECO] Lamppowerconsumptionwillbechangedbetween
[OFF]and[ECO1]automaticallyaccordingtopicture
level
NOTE:Abrightgradationmaybelessvisibledepending
ontheimage.
SteadyGreen
light
[ECO1]
Lowlamppowerconsumption(approx.75%Bright-
ness).
Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:
1. PresstheECOButtonontheremotecontroltodisplay[ECOMODE]screen.
2. PresstheECObuttonagaintoselectamodeyouwish.
• EachtimetheECObuttonispressed,thechoiceswillbechanged:
OFF → AUTO ECO → ECO1 → OFF
• WhentheprojectorisinECOmode,theLAMPindicatorwilllightgreen.
TIP:
• TheleafsymbolatthebottomofthemenushowsthecurrentselectionofECOmode.
2. Pressthe button.
The area of the magnified image will be moved
3. PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.
Each time the D-ZOOM (−) button is pressed, the image is reduced.
NOTE:
• Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.
• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnication.
29
3. Convenient Features
NOTE:
• The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu.
Select[SETUP]→[GENERAL]→[ECOMODE].
• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].
• Theprojectorisalwaysin[ECO1]for90secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblue.The
lampconditionwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[ECOMODE]ischanged.
• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysno-signalguidance,ablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]will
automaticallyswitchto[ECO1].Theprojectorwillreturntothe[OFF]onceasignalisaccepted.
• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[OFF]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[ECOMODE]automaticallychangesto[ECO1]mode
toprotecttheprojector.Whentheprojectorisin[ECO1]mode,thepicturebrightnessdecreases.Whentheprojectorcomesback
tonormaltemperature,the[ECOMODE]returnsto[OFF]mode.
Thermometersymbol[ ]indicatesthe[ECOMODE]isautomaticallysetto[ECO1]modebecausetheinternaltemperatureis
toohigh.
Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]
Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO
2
emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]
issetto[AUTOECO]or[ECO1].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].
Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBON
SAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO
2
emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcan
checktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page101)
The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO
2
emissionreductionbetweenthetimeof
changingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-
SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.
TIP:
• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO
2
emissionreduction.
AmountofCO
2
emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninAUTOECO/ECO1for
ECOMODE)×CO
2
conversionfactor.*WhentheimageisturnedoffwiththeAV-MUTEbuttonorwiththelenscoverclosed,the
amountofCO
2
emmissionreductionwillalsoincrease.
*CalculationforamountofCO
2
emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO
2
EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008
Edition”.
• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.
• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.
30
3. Convenient Features
Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]
AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeyword
isset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-
jectorcannotprojectanimage.
•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.
To enable the Security function:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Pressthebuttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthebuttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[GEN-
ERAL].
3. Pressthebuttontoselect[INSTALLATION].
4. Pressthebuttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
5.Pressthebuttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
6. TypeinacombinationofthefourbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.
The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.
31
3. Convenient Features
7. TypeinthesamecombinationofbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The SECURITY function has been enabled.
To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled:
1. PressthePOWERbutton.
 Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.
2. PresstheMENUbutton.
3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.
NOTE:Thesecuritydisablemodeismaintaineduntilthemainpoweristurnedofforunpluggingthepowercord.
32
3. Convenient Features
To disable the SECURITY function:
1. PresstheMENUbutton.
The menu will be displayed.
2.Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.
3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed.
4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequest
code.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConrmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]
isarequestcode.
33
3. Convenient Features
Operating Your Computer’s Mouse Functions from the Projector’s
Remote Control via the USB Cable (Remote Mouse Function)
Thebuilt-inremotemousefunctionenablesyoutooperateyourcomputer’smousefunctionsfromthesuppliedremote
controlwhentheprojectorisconnectedtoacomputerviaacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB
2.0specications).
TheRemoteMousefunctionworksfortheCOMPUTER1orCOMPUTER2inputwhilethecomputerscreenisdis-
played.
TheRemoteMousefunctionwillnotworkwhileyoufreezeormagnifyanimage.
- UsingtheUSBcabletoconnecttheprojectorandthecomputerwillalsostartUSBDisplayfunction.(→page
34)
USB (PC)
NOTE:
• AUSBcablemustsupporttheUSB2.0Specications.
• Themousefunctioncanbeusedwiththefollowingoperatingsystems:
Windows7,WindowsXP,orWindowsVista
• InolderversionthanSP2ofWindowsXP,ifthemousecursorwillnotmovecorrectly,dothefollowing:
CleartheEnhancepointerprecisioncheckboxunderneaththemousespeedsliderintheMousePropertiesdialogbox[Pointer
Optionstab].
• Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingtheUSBcablebeforereconnectingitandviceversa.Thecomputermaynotidentify
theUSBcableifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapidintervals.
NOTE:
• ConnecttheprojectortothecomputerwithaUSBcableafterstartingthecomputer.Failuretosomayfailtostartthecomputer.
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control
Youcanoperateyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrol.
PAGE / Button ���������������������������scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint
on your computer�
 Buttons ������������������������������moves the mouse cursor on your computer�
MOUSE L-CLICK/ENTER Button ������works as the mouse left button�
MOUSE R-CLICK Button ������������������works as the mouse right button�
NOTE:
• Whenyouoperatethecomputerusingthe orbuttonwiththemenudisplayed,boththemenuandthemousepointer
willbeaffected.Closethemenuandperformthemouseoperation.
TIP:YoucanchangethePointerspeedontheMousePropertiesdialogboxontheWindows.Formoreinformation,seetheuser
documentationoronlinehelpsuppliedwithyourcomputer.
USB cable (not supplied)
34
3. Convenient Features
Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector
via the USB Cable (USB Display)
UsingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB2.0specications)toconnectthecomputerwiththe
projectorallowsyoutosendyourcomputerscreenimagetotheprojectorfordisplaying.PowerOn/Offandsource
selectionoftheprojectorcanbedonefromyourcomputerwithoutconnectingacomputercable(VGA).
NOTE:
• TomakeUSBDISPLAYavailableonWindowsXP,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege.
• USBDisplayusesfunctionsofImageExpressUtilityLitecontainedonNECProjectorCD-ROM(→page160).
StartingUSBDisplay,however,willnotinstallImageExpressUtilityLiteonyourcomputer.ThisisbecauseUSBDisplayexecutes
theprojector’sprogramonly.
• USBDisplaywillnotworkin[POWER-SAVING]of[STANDBYMODE].(→page99)
1. Startthecomputer.
2. Connecttheprojector’spowercordtothewalloutletandputtheprojectorintostandbycondition.
• Opentheprojector’slenscover.
3. UsetheUSBcabletoconnectthecomputerwiththeprojector.
USB (PC)
The message “The projector is in standby mode. Connect it?” will be displayed on the computer screen.
• ThecontrolwindowofImageExpressUtilityLitewillbedisplayedonthetopofthescreen.
NOTE:Depending on the computer setting, the “AutoPlay”window may be displayed when the
computerdetectstheconnection to theprojector.Ifthis happens, clickthe“StartUSB Display”
window.
4. Click“Yes”.
The projector will turn on and the message “The projector is getting ready. Please wait.” will be displayed on the
computer screen. This message will disappear in a few seconds.
USB cable (not supplied)
→ To wall outlet
Power cord (supplied)
35
3. Convenient Features
5. Operatethecontrolwindow.
(1) (Source) ����� Selects an input source of the projector�
(2) (Picture) ���� Turns on or off the AV-MUTE (Picture mute), FREEZE (Freeze a picture), and Geometric Correction Tool
(GCT) functions�
(3) (Sound) ����� Turns on or off AV-MUTE (Sound mute), play the sound and turns up or down the volume�
(4) (Etc) ����������� Uses “Update”, “HTTP Server”*, “Settings” and “Information”�
* The HTTP Server cannot be selected when a USB cable is connected�
(5) (Exit) ���������� Exit Image Express Utility Lite� You can also turn off the projector at the same time�
(6) (Help) ����������� Displays the help of Image Express Utility Lite�
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)(6)
36
3. Convenient Features
Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser
Overview
TheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:
1. Settingforwired/wirelessnetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)
To use wireless LAN connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit is required. (→ page 139)
(The North American models are distributed with the USB Wireless LAN Unit as standard.)
To use wired/wireless LAN connection, connect the projector to the computer with a commercially available LAN
cable. (→ page 138)
2. SettingAlertMail(ALERTMAIL)
 Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawired/wirelessnetwork,lampreplacetimeorerrormessageswillbesentvia
e-mail.
3. Operatingtheprojector
Power on/off, selecting input, volume control and picture adjustments are possible.
4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON
TwowaysofaccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionareavailable:
• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing
URL:
 http://<theprojector’sIPaddress>/index.html
• UseImageExpressUtilityLitecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].
NOTE:
• Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.
• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournet-
work.
Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedin
rapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-
tor.
• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourweb
browser(orclearthecache).
• Thisdeviceuses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwill
varydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelplesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.
Preparation before Use
ConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page138)
Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthe
settingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeenset
willnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbe
reectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.
37
3. Convenient Features
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser
RegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-
jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressofthe
projectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorresponding
totheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”leofthecomputerbeingused.
Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetwork
settingbyspecifying
http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingby
specifying
http://192.168.73.1/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.
ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�
OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�
VOLUME:Thiscontrolsthevolumeoftheprojector.
��������������������������� Increases the volume adjustment value�
��������������������������� Decreases the volume adjustment value�
AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.
PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�
PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�
SOUND ON ������������ Mutes the audio�
SOUND OFF ����������� Cancels the audio muting�
ALL ON ������������������ Mutes each of the video, and audio functions�
ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio functions�
38
3. Convenient Features
PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.
BRIGHTNESS ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�
BRIGHTNESS ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�
CONTRAST �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�
CONTRAST �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�
COLOR �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�
COLOR �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�
HUE ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�
HUE ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�
• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page
85)
SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.
COMPUTER 1 �������� Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector�
COMPUTER 2 �������� Switches to the COMPUTER 2 IN connector�
HDMI ��������������������� Switches to the HDMI IN connector�
VIDEO �������������������� Switches to the VIDEO IN connector�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector�
VIEWER ����������������� Switches to the data on the USB memory device�
NETWORK ������������� Switches to a LAN signal�
USB DISPLAY �������� Switches to the USB Port (PC)�
PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.
LAMP LIFE REMAINING �����Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage�
LAMP HOURS USED �����������Displays how many hours the lamp has been used�
FILTER HOURS USED ���������Displays how many hours the filter has been used�
ERROR STATUS ������������������ Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�
LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).
39
3. Convenient Features
NETWORK SETTINGS
• SETTINGS
WIRED or WIRELESS
SETTING SetforwiredLANorforwirelessLAN.
APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLANorwirelessLAN.
DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyour
DHCPserver.
DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetwork
administrator.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
WINS SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen
[DHCP]isturnedon,thisoptionisnotavailable.
AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassignIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtothe
projector.
AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.
Setting for WIRED LAN
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.
DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection
Setting for WIRELESS LAN (the optional Wireless LAN Unit required for Europe, Australia, and Asian coun-
tries)
EASYCONNECTION ExecuteawirelessLANusingEASYCONNECTION.
SIMPLEACCESPOINT Settheprojectorforsimpleaccesspoint.
WPS UseWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetup™)tosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
CHANNEL Selectachannel.Availablechannelsvarydependingonthecountryandregion.When
youselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],makesurethattheprojectorandyouraccesspoint
areonthesamechannel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojectorand
yourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwirelessLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE
2.
40
3. Convenient Features
SSID Enteranidentier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcan bedoneonly with
equipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyourwirelessLAN.
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.SelectanSSIDwhichyou
canaccess.
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE:Selectthisoptionwhencommunicatingwithoneormoreequip-
mentconnectedtothewirelessLANnetworkviaawirelessaccesspoint.
ADHOC:SelectthisoptionwhenusingthewirelessLANtodirectlycommunicatewith
acomputerinpeer-to-peermode.
SECURITYTYPE Turnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmission.Whenturnontheencryp-
tionmode,setWEPkeyorencryptedkey.
DISABLE Willnotturnontheencryptionfeature.Yourcommunicationsmay
bemonitoredbysomeone.
WEP64bit Uses64-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.
WEP128bit Uses128-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.Thisoptionwill
increaseprivacyand securitywhencompared to useof64-bit
datalengthencryption.
WPA-PSKTKIP/
WPA-PSKAES/
WPA2-PSKTKIP/
WPA2-PSKAES/
WPA-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2
Theseoptionsparovidestrongersecurity
thanWEP.
NOTE:
• TheWEPsettingsmustbethesameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointin
yourwirelessnetwork.
• WhenyouuseWEP,yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslowdown.
• OtherencryptionkeysthanWEP64bitandWEP128bitarenotavailablewhen[ADHOC]is
selectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
• Toinstalladigitalcerticate,usetheprojector’smenu.(→page112)
INDEX
Selectencryptionkeywhenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITY
TYPE].
KEY
Whenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITYTYPE]:
EnterWEPkey.
Select Characters(ASCII) Hexadecimaldigit(HEX)
WEP64bit Upto5characters Upto10characters
WEP128bit Upto13characters Upto26characters
When selecting [WPA PSK-TKIP], [WPA PSK-AES], [WPA2 PSK-TKIP] or[WPA2
PSK-AES]:
Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
USERNAME SetausernameforWPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.
PASSWORD SetapasswordforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAP
v2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2.
41
3. Convenient Features
USEDIGITALCERTIFI-
CATE
SelectthisifyouuseadigitalcerticateforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-
EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAES
PEAP-MSCHAPv2.
• NAME
PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentifytheprojector.A
projectornamemustbe16charactersorless.
TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe
15orless.
DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainname
mustbe60charactersorless.
• ALERT MAIL
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mail
whenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.
ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.
Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Pleasereplacethelampand
lters.
ProjectorName:NECProjector
LampHoursUsed:100[H]
SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.
SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.
RECIPIENT’SADDRESS
1,2,3
Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.
TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornot
NOTE:
• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork
settingsarecorrect.
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthis
happen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.
42
3. Convenient Features
• NETWORK SERVICE
PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforget
yourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.
HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.
AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetwork
supportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrec-
ognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.
*WhatisPJLink?
PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardproto-
colisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
• CRESTRON
DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.
IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.
• INFORMATION
WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.
WIRELESSLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwirelessLANconnection.
UPDATE Reectsettingswhentheyarechanged.
43
3. Convenient Features
Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector
via a Network [NETWORK PROJECTOR]
ByselectingtheprojectorconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatofyourPC,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.Thereisnoneedofconnectionusingthecomputercable(VGA).
Operation Environment
ApplicableOS Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
Hardwarespecications ThespecicationsrecommendedbyMicrosoftastheoperationenvironmentfor
Windows7/WindowsVistashouldbesatised.
NetworkEnvironment WiredLANorwirelessLANenvironmentthatsupportsTCP/IPisrequired.
Screencolor HighColor(16bits)
TrueColor(24bitsand32bits)
*Settingwith256colorsorlessisnotavailable.
Setting the Projector to Network Projector Input Mode
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
APPLICATION MENU screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.
44
3. Convenient Features
2. PresstheSELECT or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
In the screen, the [APPLICATION MENU] menu is displayed.
3. Fromthe[APPLICATIONMENU]menu,select[NETWORKPROJECTOR].
The [PROJECTOR NAME/DISPLAY RESOLUTION/PASSWORD/URL] will be displayed.
45
3. Convenient Features
Projecting the Image with Network Projector
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[AllPrograms].
3. Click[Accessories].
4. Click[ConnecttoaNetworkProjector].
 Whenthe[PermissionConnecttoaNetworkProjector]windowappears,click[Yes.].
 The“ConnecttoaNetworkProjector”windowappears.
5. Click[→Searchforaprojector(recommended)].
In the “Available projectors” box, “P420 Series” is displayed.
6. Click[P420Series].
The message “Enter the password for the projector that you selected.” is displayed at the bottom of the window.
46
3. Convenient Features
7. Inputthepasswordtothepasswordinputboxdisplayedbytheoperationatstep3onpage44.
8. Click[Connect].
 ThenetworkprojectorfunctionworksandthescreenofWindows7isprojectedfromtheprojector.
• Iftheresolutionofyourcomputer’sscreenisdifferentfromtheprojector’sscreenresolution,theNETWORK
PROJECTORfunctionmaynotwork.Ifthishappens,changetheresolutionofthecomputer’sscreentolower
resolution than the one displayed at Step 3 on page 44.
NOTE:Whenthenetworkprojectorfunctionworks,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopchangestosolidcolor.Whenthenetwork
projectorfunctionisstopped,theoriginalbackgroundcolorisrestored.
Reference:IftheprojectorcannotbefoundatStep5,click[→Entertheprojectoraddress].Then,inputthe“Networkaddress”
(Inputexample:http://10.32.97.61/lan)and“Projectorpassword”(Inputexample:82291627)displayedinthescreenprojected
fromtheprojector.
Exiting the Network Projector Operation
1. Click[Projecting:P420Series]intheWindowsVistataskbar.
2. Click[Disconnect].
 TheNetworkProjectorfunctionisstopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
47
3. Convenient Features
Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network
[REMOTE DESKTOP]
• ByselectingthePCconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatoftheprojector,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.
Then,byoperatingthekeyboard,youcanoperateWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPonthePCconnected
withthenetwork.
• WiththeRemoteDesktopfunction,youcanremotelyoperatethePCplacedatadistancefromtheprojector.
Meetingroom
Ofce
NOTE:
• The[REMOTEDESKTOP]functionwillworkonthefollowingWindowseditions.
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
WindowsXPProfessionalwithServicePack3
(Note)
• Inthisuser’smanualthisfeatureisdescribedusingWindows7asanexample,butWindowsVistaandWindowsXPProfessional
ServicePack2orlaterwillalsoworkwiththisfeature.
• AkeyboardisrequiredtousetheRemoteDesktopfunction.
• TheRemoteDesktopfunctioncanbeoperatedwithakeyboard.Usingawirelessmousewithawirelesskeyboardismoreuseful
foroperating.
Useacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard,awirelessmouse,andaUSBwirelessreceiver.
UseacommerciallyavailableUSBkeyboardandUSBmouse.
• AUSBkeyboardwithabuilt-inUSBhubcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• AwirelesskeyboardormousethatsupportsBluetoothcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBdevicesinthemarket.
Prepareacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard(USlayoutversion).
ConnecttheUSBwirelessreceivertotheUSBport(TypeA)oftheprojector.Makeallnecessarysettingsforyour
wirelesskeyboardandmouse.
48
3. Convenient Features
Setting the password to the user account of Windows 7
TIP:Ifapasswordhasbeensetforanaccount,thesteps1to9canbeskipped.
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Addorremoveuseraccounts]displayedunder[UserAccounts].
4. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
5. Click[Administrator].
6. Click[Createapassword].
7. Inputthepasswordtothe[Newpassword]box.
8. InputthesamepasswordasthatatStep7tothe[Conrmnewpassword]box.
9. Click[Createapassword].
The Administrator is changed to [Password Protection].
Setting the Remote Access
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[SystemandSecurity].
4. Click[Allowremoteaccess]displayedunder[System].
5. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
The [System Properties] window appears.
6. Click[AllowconnectionsfromcomputersrunninganyversionofRemoteDesktop(lesssecure)]inthe
RemoteDesktopboxandclick[OK].
Checking the IP address on Windows 7
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Viewnetworkstatusandtasks]displayedunder[NetworkandInternet].
49
3. Convenient Features
4. Click[Viewstatus]displayedinblueontherightof[LocalAreaConnection]inthewindow.
The [Local Area Connection Status] window appears.
5. Click[Details...].
Write down the value for “IPv4 IP Address” (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) displayed.
6. Click[Close].
7. Click[X]attheupperrightofthewindow.
 Thesystemgoesbacktothedesktop.
Starting the Remote Desktop
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
NETWORK screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.
50
3. Convenient Features
2. PresstheSELECT or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [NETWORK] menu will be displayed.
3. Fromthe[NETWORK]menu,usethewirelesskeyboardtoselect[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION].
The [REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION] window appears.
4. OperatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheIPaddressofWindows7andclick“Connect”.
The log-on screen of Windows 7 is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.
5. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheuser’spasswordandpress“Enter”.
 Theremotedesktopfunctionisstarted.
 Windows7desktopisdisplayedinthescreenprojectedbytheprojector.
Log out the computer.
 UsethewirelesskeyboardconnectedtotheprojectortooperateWindows7.
NOTE:Whentheprojectionismadewiththeremotedesktopfunction,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopischangedtosolid
color.
51
3. Convenient Features
Exiting the Remote Desktop
1. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoclick[Start]fromthedesktopscreenprojectedbytheprojector.
2. Click[X]ontherightofthestartmenu.
 Theremotedesktopfunctionisstopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
TIP:
Setting[OPTIONS]inREMOTEDESKTOP
Clicking[OPTIONS]displaysthe[PERFORMANCE]screen.
Makingsettingsto[OPTIONS]willallowyoutodisplaythedesktopbackground,ortoenablethewindowanimationfunctionduring
theRemoteDesktopoperation.However,doingthiswillcausethedisplay’sormouse’sresponsetoslowdown.
Ifthedisplay’sormouse’sresponseissloweddown,tryoneormoreofthefollowing:
DESKTOPBACKGROUND:Clearthecheckmarktodisplaythedesktopbackgroundinsolidcolor.
MENUANDWINDOWANIMATION:Clearthecheckmarktodisablemenuandwindowanimation.
THEMES:ClearthecheckmarknottouseThemes.
SHOWCONTENTSOFWINDOWWHILEDRAGGING:Clearthecheckmarktoshowonlythewindowpanewhile
dragging.
52
4. Using the Viewer
❶ What you can do with the Viewer
TheViewerfeatureallowsyoutoviewslidesormovielesstoredonaUSBmemoryontheprojector,orashared
folderinacomputerconnectedtothenetwork.
TheViewerhasthefollowingfeatures.
• WhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmemorythatstoresimagelesisinsertedintotheUSBport(TypeA)ofthe
projector,theViewerallowsyoutoviewtheimagelesontheUSBmemory.
Evenifnocomputerisavailable,presentationscanbeconductedsimplywiththeprojector.
• Movielewithaudiocanbeplayedback.
• AMicrosoftPowerPointleorAdobePDFlecanbesimplyprojectedonthescreenwithoutconnectingacom-
puter.
• Imageandmovielesstoredinasharedfolderinacomputerconnectedtoanetworkcanbeprojected.
Thecomputerwith“MediaSharing”ofWindowsMediaPlayer11turnedoncanbeusedasamediaserver.
Supported graphic formats
Format Filenameextension
JPEG .jpg,.jpe,.jpeg(CMYKisnotsupported.)
BMP .bmp(biteldnotsupported)
PNG
.png(InterlacedPNGandαchannelPNGarenotsupported.)
GIF .gif(InterlacedGIF,transparationGIF,andanimationGIFarenotsupported.)
*ByusingPPTConverter3.0,PowerPointleisconvertedintoindexle(withextension“.idx”)
*Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon willbedisplayed.
NOTE:
Maximumnumberofpixelsofimagewhichcanbedisplayedare:
• BaselineJPEG:10000×10000
• ProgressiveJPEG:1280×1280
• GIF:1280×1280
• Others:4000×4000
• Somelessupportedbytheaboverequirementsmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported movie files
Filenameextension Videocompression/expansionmethod Audiocompression/expansionmethod
.mpg,.mpeg. MPEG2 MPEGAudioLayer2
MPEGAudioLayer3
.wmv VC-1/WMV9 WMA9Standard
.mp4 H.264/AVC AAC-LC
Playback requirements:
Resolution:320×240to1280×720
Videoframerate:upto30fps
Bitrate:upto15Mbps
Audiosamplingrate:upto48kHz
Channel:upto2chstereo
Audiobitrate:upto256Kbps
Max.lesize:upto2GB
53
4. Using the Viewer
NOTE:
• Movielesconvertedbyusingthevideo/audioformatwhichisnotsupportedbythisprojectorcannotbeplayedback.
Inthiscase,therewillbenoicontoshowthatplaybackisnotpossible.
• FileswithDigitalRightsManagement(DRM)protectioncannotbeplayedback.
• Someofthemovielesthatmeettheaboverequirementsmaynotbeplayedback.
• WMVformatvideolewillbedisplayedinanaspectratioof1to1independentlyofitsoriginalaspectratio.
• Filesthatcanbeplayedbackonthemediaserveraregraphicsandmovieles.InWindowsMediaPlayer11(WindowsXP/
WindowsVista)mp4lescannotbeplayedback.
Supported PDF files
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.pdf AdobeAcrobatPDF
NOTE:
• FontsnotembeddedinPDFmaynotbedisplayed
• FunctionsaddedtoPDFleaftercreatedwillnotworkordisplay.Functionsaddedarebookmarks,boxesinformtool,andnotes
willnotbedisplayed.
AutoiporAutotransitionwillnotwork.
• SomePDFlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported PowerPoint les
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.ppt,.pptx MicrosoftPowerPoint97–2007
NOTE:
• Playablefonts,colors,fontornament,placement,objectinsertionoranimationarerestricted.
• SomeMicrosoftPowerPoint97–2007lesmaynotbedisplayed.
Supported USB memory devices
- BesuretouseaUSBmemorydeviceformattedwiththeFAT,exFAT,FAT32orFAT16lesystem.
 TheprojectordoesnotsupportNTFSformattedUSBmemory.
 IftheprojectordoesnotrecognizeyourUSBmemory,checkiftheformatissupported.
 ToformatyourUSBmemoryinyourcomputer,refertothedocumentorhelplethatcomeswithyourWin-
dows.
- WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBmemoriesinthemarket.
54
4. Using the Viewer
Notices on shared folder and media server
• Filesfromasharedfolderormediaservermaynotbeprojectedifsecurityorantivirussoftwareisinstalledonyour
computer.
• Openthefollowingrewallports:
- Mediaserver
Portnumber Protocol
1900 UDP
2869 TCP
10243 TCP
10280-10284 UDP
- Sharedfolder
Portnumber Protocol
137 UDP/TCP
138 UDP/TCP
139 UDP/TCP
445 UDP/TCP
• Setyourcomputerforsharingandsecuritytograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolderandsetyoursecurityor
antivirussoftwaretograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolder.Consultyournetworkadministratorformoreinforma-
tion.
• Movielesinthesharedfolderorthemediaservermaynotbeplayedbackcorrectlydependingonyournetwork
environmentorthebitrateofyourle.
NOTE:
DonotdisconnectbetweentheprojectorandyourcomputerbyremovingtheLANcableorturningofftheprojectorwhenaPow-
erPointleorPDFleisdisplayedfromasharedfolder.
DoingsowillmakeViewerinoperable.
NOTE
• ThefollowingoperationsbyusingthebuttonsontheprojectorarenotpossiblewhentheVIEWERscreensuchastheslidescreen
andthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.
- Keystonecorrectionbyusingthe▲or▼button
- AutoAdjustmentbyusingtheAUTOADJ.button
- Volumecontrolwiththe◀or▶button
• FreezingpicturebyusingtheFREEZE,ASPECT,orAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolisnotpossiblewhentheVIEWER
screensuchastheslidescreenandthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.
• Executing[RESET]→[ALLDATA]fromthemenuwillreturnthesettingsfortheViewertoolbartothefactorydefault.
55
4. Using the Viewer
❷ Preparing presentation materials
1. Createyourpresentationmaterialsandsavetheminasupportedleformattoyourcomputer.
• Seepage77 for supported file formats.
• MakesurethatPowerPointleisdisplayedontheViewerbeforegivingyourrealpresentation.
With Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 contained the supplied CD-ROM, you can convert your PowerPoint files to index
files that can be displayed on the Viewer.
• WhencreatingaPDFle,embedyourfontsinyourPDFle.EmbeddingfontsrequiresAdobeAcrobat.This
cannot be done in Adobe Reader.
TIP:
• Using Print Command
ExampleforfontembeddingusingPrintCommand.SeethehelpofAdobeAcrobatformoreinformation.
1. Select“Print”fromthe“File”menu.
2. Select“AdobePDF”from“Printername”andclickthe“Properties”but-
ton.
3. Clickthe“Edit”buttoninthe“AdobePDFSettings”tab.
4. ClickthefonttabintheEditwindowtoselectthefontembedwindow.
5. Placeacheckmarkfor“Embedallfonts”.
 Click“OK”toreturntothePrintwindow,andclick“OK”tostartcreatinga
PDF file.
2. Savealetoyourdrive.
To save a file to your USB memory:
Use the Windows Explore to copy the file to your USB memory.
To place a file in a shared folder you create in your computer, see page 68.
To use “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11, see page 72.
56
4. Using the Viewer
❸ Projecting images stored in a USB memory device
ThissectionexplainsthebasicoperationoftheViewer.
TheexplanationprovidestheoperationalprocedurewhentheViewertoolbarissettothefactorydefault.
Preparation:BeforestartingtheViewer,storeimagestotheUSBmemoryusingyourcomputer.
Starting the Viewer
1. Turnontheprojector.(→page14)
2. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportoftheprojec-
tor.
NOTE:
• DonotremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwhileit’sLED
ashes.Doingsomaycorruptthedata.
TIP:
YoucanaUSBmemoryinserttheprojectorwhenthedrivelistscreen
isdisplayed.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselect[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display the
drive list screen.
Another way to select [VIEWER] is to press the VIEWER
button on the remote control.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthedrivelistscreen,seepage60.
• Todisplaygraphicsinasharedfolder,seepage68;todisplaystill
imagesormovielesinamediaserver,seepage72.
57
4. Using the Viewer
4. Press the ▶ button to select“USB1” and press the
ENTERbutton.
The “USB1” thumbnail screen will be displayed.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthumbnailscreen,seepage62.
5. Usethe▲▼◀ or ▶buttontoselectanicon.
• The→ (arrow) symbol on the right indicates there are
more pages. pressing the PAGE ▽ (page down) button
will show the next page: pressing the PAGE △ (page up)
will show the previous page.
6. PresstheENTERbutton.
Operation varies depending on the selected file.
 •Stillimage
The selected slide will be displayed.
The ◀ or ▶ button can be used to select the next (right)
slide or the previous (left) slide in the thumbnail screen.
• PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythecontrolbar
with which is used to select or rotate an slide.(→ page
63)
58
4. Using the Viewer
 •Moviele
The movie file will start playing.
 Afternishingtheplayback,thescreenwillturntoblack.
Press the EXIT button to return to the thumbnail screen.
• Pressing the ENTER button will display the movie’s
control bar with which you can pause or fastforward and
some other operations.
 •MicrosoftPowerPointle
The slide on the first page will be displayed.
Press ▶ to select the next slide; press ◀ to select the previ-
ous slide.
• Youcanalsousethe▼ or ▲ button to select a page. To
return to the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.
NOTE:
• Files with slideshow or animation effects may not be correctly
displayedontheViewer.
See“SupportedPowerPointles”onpage53,77.
 •AdobePDFle
The first page will be displayed.
• ThePDFlewillllthewidthofthescreen.
Pressing the ▼ or ▲ button will scroll the screen down or
up.
The PAGE ▼ or PAGE ▲ button will move the screen one
page down or up.
To return to the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.
• Whenapassowordinputwindowisdisplayed,itmeans
that the PDF file is password-protected.
Pressing the ENTER button will show the software
keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter your
password.
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. The PDF file
will be displayed.
• Formoreinformationonthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage
118.
NOTE:
BookmarksandnotesthatwereaddedafterPDFconversionwillnot
bedisplayed.
IffontswerenotembeddedatthetimeofPDFconversion,thosefonts
willnotbedisplayed.
TIP:
Ittakessometime(about30secondstotwominutes)todisplaya
largesizeleortoturnpagesofaPDFlethathasmanypages.
59
4. Using the Viewer
 •Indexle(extension:.idx)
• Index les, which is converted by usingViewer PPT
Converter 3.0, will appear in the Thumbnail screen.
Only folders and JPEG files converted by using
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will appear in the Thumbnail
screen.
• Toselectslideshowofindexles,openthe[PRESENTA-
TION] folder in the DRIVE LIST screen.
However, index files will not appear. Only folders and
JPEG files will appear.
• UptofourindexfoldersinyourUSBandsharedfolder
are displayed. The four folders will be displayed in reverse
chronological order
• WhenyouinserttheUSBmemorydevicestoringindex
with the Viewer in operation, the content of the index files
will be displayed.
NOTE:
• Theplaymode(MANUAL/AUTO)forslidesofindexleworksin
thefollowingway:
Incaseof[MANUAL]for[PLAYMODE]
Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→[MANUAL],indexleswillbesetformanualplaybackinregard-
lessofwhether[INTERVAL]isset.
Incaseof[AUTO]selectedfor[PLAYMODE]
Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→ [AUTO], index les will be set for auto playback at intervals
speciedbyusing[INTERVAL].
When,however,[-1]isselectedfor[INTERVAL],theplaymodewill
besetforautoplaybackaccordingtothesettingfor[OPTIONS]→
[SLIDESETTING]→[INTERVAL].
7. RemovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojector.
 Returntothedrivelistscreen.MakesurethattheLEDon
the USB memory is not flashing before removing the USB
memory.
NOTE:IfyouremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwithaslide
displayed,theprojectormaynotoperatecorrectly.Ifthishappens,
turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercord.Wait3minutes,then
connectthepowercord,andturnontheprojector.
Exiting the Viewer
1. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselectasourceotherthan
[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display
another source.
• To exit theViewer using the remote control, select a
source other than [VIEWER].
XXXX Motors
60
4. Using the Viewer
Names and functions of Viewer screen
TheViewerhasthreescreens:Drivelistscreen,Thumbnailscreen,andSlidescreen.
• Drive list screen
Displaysalistofdrivesconnectedtotheprojector.
Menu operation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythesubmenu.
Operation for Drive list screen
1. Pressthe▶buttontomovethecursortothedrivelist.
(Use the ◀ or ▶ button to switch between the menu and the drive list.)
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select a type of drive; press the ◀ or ▶ button to select the drive connected to the
projector.
2. SelectthedriveandpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtothethumbnailscreenoftheselecteddrive.
Cursor (yellow) Cursor (yellow)
Menu Menu
Scroll bar
[Drive list screen] [Thumbnail screen]
Folder icon
Path information
Drive information/File information
Menu guide
Operation button guide
Control bar
* The operation for still image differs from that for movie.
[Slide screen]
61
4. Using the Viewer
Functions
Name Description
REFRESH Displaysadditionalmediaserversinthedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS OpenstheOPTIONSmenu.
SLIDESETTING
Setsupslides.(→page65)
MOVIESETTING
Setsupmovieles.(→page66)
AUTOPLAYSETTING
Setsupautoplay.(→page66)
SHAREEDFOLDER
Setsupasharedfolder.(→page68)
MEDIASERVER
Setsupamediaserver.(→page72)
RETURN ClosestheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSETTING Switchestothesystemsettingmenu.SeewiredLAN,wirelessLAN,WPS,
networkinformation,mouse,and keyboardin“9. ApplicationMenu”. (→
page105)
USB Displays the iconfora USB memoryinserted into the USBport of the
projector.
SHAREDFOLDER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingasharedfolder).
*Seepage68forsettingupforconnectingasharedfoleroftheprojector.
MEDIASERVER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingamediaserver).
*Seepage72forsettingupforconnectingamediaserveroftheprojector
PRESENTATION DisplaystheiconwhenaUSBmemoryorsharedfolerstoresindexles.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Driveinformation [Example]
USB1 314MBFREE/492MB
Displaysthedrive. Displaysfreespaceandcapcityof
adrive.(USBonly)
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
*Itisdisplayedinthree-digitnumber(roundingup)
NOTE:
WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistscreenorthumbnailscreenisnotdisplayed.Todisplayit,selectthe[RETURN]
iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
62
4. Using the Viewer
• Thumbnail screen
Displaysalistoffolders,thumbnails,andiconsinthedriveselectedonthedrivelistscreen.
Menu operation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythemenuorsettingscreen.
Operation for Thumbnail screen
1. Press the ▶ button to movethe cursor to the thumbnail screen when the OPTIONS menu is not dis-
played.
2. Pressthe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectaleorfolder.
3. PresstheENTERbuttontostartslideshoworplaybackoftheselectedle.Selectingafolderwilldisplay
itsthumbnailscreen.
Functions
Name Description
UP Goestooneupperlevelmenu.
THUMBNAIL Switchestwodisplaysbetweenthumbnailandicon.
SORTSETTING Rearrangesfoldersorles.
DRIVELIST Returnstothedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS ChangestotheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSET-
TING
Opensthesystemsettingmenu.
Scrollbar Thumbnailscreenwilldisplay12leswith4by3.Ifthethumbnailscreenhastwelveor
morelesorfolders,thescrollbarwillbedisplayedattherightside.UsingthePAGE
▼orPAGE▲buttonwillscrollthewholescreendownorup.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Thumbnailinformation [Example]
005.jpg 5/200 11/03/201013:25:12 502KB
Selectedfolder
nameorle
name
Numbersandorderof
lesinafolder(only
whenfolderselected)
Create/Changedate:
M/D/Y/H/M/B
Displaysle
capacity
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
TIP:
• Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon[?]willbedisplayed,
• Themaximumdisplayablenumberofimagesis300inthethumbnailscreenincludingthenumberoffolders.
• Ifalenameorpathofafolderislongerthanspecied,itwillbedisplayedwithcentercharactersorpathskipped.
Example:“123456789.jpg”willbedisplayedin“123..789.jpg”.
63
4. Using the Viewer
• Slide screen (still image/movie)
Playsaleselectedfromalistofthumbnailsoricons.
• ForoperatingaMicrosoftPowerPointleandAdobePDFle,seepage58.
Control bar operation
• Thecontrolbarwillbedisplayedonlywhenastillimage(orindexle)andamovieleisselected.
• Thecontrolbarforstillimagesdiffersfromthatformovieles.
1. PressingtheENTERbuttoninSlidescreenwilldisplaythecontrolbaratthebottomofthescreen.
2. Usethe◀ or ▶buttontoselectaleandpresstheENTERbutton.
• Theselectedfunctionwillbeexecuted.
Functions of still image control bar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothepreviousimage
PLAY Playstheimage.Thisbuttonalsoisusedtostoporstartplayinganimage.
NEXT Goestothenextimage.
RIGHT Rotatestheimage90°clockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
LEFT Rotatestheimage90°counterclockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
SIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspect ratiointhe projector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stops playing slides or slideshow,and closesthe control bar to return to the thumbnail
screen.
64
4. Using the Viewer
Functions of movie control bar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothebeginningofamoviele.
• Goesbacktothebeginningofthepreviousmovieleifexecutedimmediatelyafterbeing
startedplaying.
FR Fast-rewindsamovieleforabout7seconds.
PLAY/PAUSE PLAY Playsamoviele.
PAUSE Stopsplayingamoviele.
FF Fast-forwardsamovieleforabout7seconds.
NEXT Goestothebeginningofanextmoviele.
TIME Displaysanelapsedtimeforplaybackorpause.
SIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stopsplayingamovie,andclosesthecontrolbartoreturntothethumbnailscreen.
65
4. Using the Viewer
Viewer option settings
• SLIDE SETTING
Setsstillimagesorslides.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
PLAYMODE MANUAL Selectsmanualplay.
AUTO Selectsautoplay.
INTERVAL 5-300seconds Specifies interval time when [AUTO] is selected for PLAY
MODE.
REPEAT
Checkmark Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
TIP
• Toplayoneormoreslides,placethoselesintoafolder.
66
4. Using the Viewer
• MOVIE SETTING
Setsthefunctionsforamoviele.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
REPEAT OFF Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
ONEREPEAT Repeatsoneleonly.
ALLREPEAT Repeatsalllesinthecurrentfolder.
TIP
• Turningon[REPEAT]willdisplayblackscreenduringintermissionbetweenmovies.
• AUTO PLAY SETTING
SetsautoplayforslideshowwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojector,orwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
Name Options Description
AUTOPLAY OFF —
PICTURE
Playsarstfoundstillimageinadrive.
MOVIE Playsarstfoundmovieleinadrive.
PowerPoint PlaysarstfoundPowerPointleinadrive.
TIP
• AutoplaybehaviorisdifferentbetweenwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojectorandwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
• AutoplaystartsfortherstfoundlesupportingtheletypesetupforAutoPlay.Thelewillbesearchedinthedriverootor
lowerlevel.
• When[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE],thelastselectedlewillbeautomaticallyplayedifitisfound,orthelastselectedfolder
willbesearchedandtherstfoundlewillbeautomaticallyplayed.
ToautomaticallyplayamovieleinaUSBmemory,storeonemovieleorchangeitslenamesothatitcanbesearchedrst.
67
4. Using the Viewer
• SORT SETTING
Setstheorderofdisplayingthumbnailsorslides.
Name Options Description
SORT
NAME(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameinascendingorder.
NAME(ZYX..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameindescendingorder.
EXT.(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybyextensioninascending or-
der.
EXT.(ZYX..) Displays the les alphabetically by extension in descending
order.
DATE(NEW) Displaysthelesinreversechronologicalorder.
DATE(OLD) Displaysthelesinchronologicalorder.
SIZE(BIG) Displaysthelesindescendingorderofitslesize.
SIZE(SMALL) Displaysthelesinascendingorderofitslesize.
68
4. Using the Viewer
❹ Projecting data from shared folder
LAN
Shared folder
Wireless LAN
Projector
Shared folder
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Placelestobeprojectedinasharedfolderandnotethefolder’spath.Memorizeorwritedownthe
pathforlateruse.
• Forsharingafolder,refertoyouruserguideorhelpleaccompaniedwithyourWindowscomputer.
• Useakeyboardtogiveanametothesharedfolderinalphanumericcharacters.
• Toconnectthesharedfolderbeyondthesubnet,set[WINSCONFIGURATION]in[NETWORKSETTINGS]from
themenu.
• Digitalsignature(SMBsignature)isnotsupported.
Connecting the projector to the shared folder
1. PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The drive list window will be displayed.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→ page
16)
69
4. Using the Viewer
2. Displaysthe[OPTIONS]menu.
Press the ▼ button to select the (OPTIONS) icon and press the ENTER button.
• WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistwillnotbedisplayed.
3. Displaythe[SHAREDFOLDERSETTING]screen.
Press the ▼ button to select the (SHARED FOLDER SETTING) icon and press the ENETR button.
4. Selectafoldernumberandplacetoenableit.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to a shared folder number and press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] , and then press
the ENTER button.
5. Enterthepath,username,andpasswordforthesharedfolder.
Press the ▼buttontoselectthe[SHAREDFOLDER]eld.Thesoftwarekeyboardwillbedisplayed.
 Forusingthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage118.
• Ifyourcomputerisnotpasswordprotected,enteringapasswordisnotrequired.
• Uptofoursharedfolderscanbeadded.
• Themaximumlengthofapathofthesharedfoldermustbe15alphanumericcharactersforcomputernameand
23 alphanumeric characters for folder name.
70
4. Using the Viewer
6. Exitthesetting.
Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
This will close the [SHARED FOLDER] screen.
• Ifanerrormessageappear,yoursettingsarenotcorrect.Tryagain.
71
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector
• Disablethenumberofasharedfolderyouwishtodisconnect
Press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] and press the ENTER button to clear it.
NOTE:
• WhenaPowerPointleorPDFleisdisplayed,donotdisconnectyourLANcable.Ifdoingso,theViewerwillnotwork.
TIP:
• ConnectingsettingsforSharedfolder
Settingsofuptofourfolderscanbesaved.
Restartingtheprojectorwilldisplaysetting-savedsharedfoldersingreyfoldericononthedrivelistscreen.
Selectingthegreyiconfolderwillskipentryforafolderpath.
• Failingtoconnectwithasharedfolderwilldisplaythefoldericonwith“x”mark.Ifthishappen,checkyourfoldersetting.
72
4. Using the Viewer
❺ Projecting data from media server
LAN
Media server
Media server
Wireless LAN
Media server
Projector
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Prepareimagelesormovielestobeprojected,andsetup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer
11orWindowsMediaPlayer12.
NOTE:
• Boththeprojectorandthemediaservermustbeonthesamesubnet.Connectingtothemediaserverbeyondthesubnetisnot
possible.
• TypesofimagesandmovieswhichcanbesharedmayvarydependingonWindowsversion.
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer11.
2. Select“MediaSharing”from“Library”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box will be displayed.
73
4. Using the Viewer
3. Select“Sharemymedia”checkbox,andthenselectOK.
A list of accessible devices will be displayed.
4. Select“P420Series”andthen“Allow”.
 Acheckmarkwillbeaddedtothe“P420Series”icon.
• The“P420Series”isaprojectornamespeciedin[NETWORKSETTINGS].
5. Select“OK”.
 Thiswillmakepicturesandvideoin“Library”availablefromtheprojector.
74
4. Using the Viewer
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 12
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer12.
2. Select“Stream”,andthenselect“Automaticallyallowdevicestoplaymymedia”.
The “Allow All Media Devices” windows will be displayed.
3. Select“Automaticallyallowallcomputersandmediadevices”.
Graphics and movie files in “Library” can be used from the projector.
75
4. Using the Viewer
Connecting the projector to the media server
PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
TheVIEWERwillstart.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→page
16)
• Thiswillstartsearchingforacomputerwith“mediasharing”enabledinthenetworkandaddittothe“Mediaserver”
ofthethumbnailscreen.
Anotherwaytodothisistopointthecursorto“Mediaserver”andselect[REFRESH]fromthethumbnailmenu
andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:
• Uptofouraccessiblemediaserverscanbeautomaticallysearchedanddisplayed.Thefthdeviceorlatercannotbedisplayed.
(→page56)
76
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the projector from the media server
1. DisplaytheOPTIONSmenu.
Press the ▼ button to select the [OPTIONS] icon and select the ENTER button.
2. DisplaytheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.
Press the ▼ button to select the MEDIA SERVER icon and press the ENTER button.
3. Disabletheconnection.
 PresstheENTERbuttontoclearthecheckmarktodisabletheconnection.
Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button to close the MEDIA SERVER setting screen.
77
4. Using the Viewer
❻ Restrictions on displaying files
TheViewerallowsyoutogiveasimplieddisplayofaPowerPointleorPDFle.
Duetosimplieddisplay,however,actualdisplaymaybedifferentfromtheoneonyourcomputerapplicationpro-
gram.
Some restrictions on PowerPoint files
• Fontswillbeautomaticallyconvertedtothefontsinstalledintheprojector.Fontscanvaryinsizeorwidth,causing
layoutcorruption
Somecharactersorfontsmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonanimation,selection,orhyperlink.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesMicrosoftPowerPoint97-2007formatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Some restrictions on PDF files
• FontsnotembeddedatthetimeofPDFcreationmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonannotations,selection,form,orcolorspace.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesAdobeAcrobatformatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
78
5. Using On-Screen Menu
1 Using the Menus
NOTE:Theon-screenmenumaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhileinterlacedmotionvideoimageisprojected.
1. PresstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythemenu.
NOTE:ThecommandssuchasENTER,EXIT,,inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.
2. Pressthebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenu.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemortherst
tab.
4. Usethebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselecttheitemyouwanttoadjustor
set.
 Youcanusethebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselectthetabyouwant.
5. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.
6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthebuttonsontheremotecontrolor
theprojectorcabinet.
Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.
7. Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-
torcabinettoquitthemenudisplay.
NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.
8.PresstheMENUbuttontoclosethemenu.
 Toreturntothepreviousmenu,presstheEXITbutton.
79
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Elements
Slide bar
Solid triangle
Tab
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
ECO mode symbol
Wireless symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Highlight �����������������������������Indicates the selected menu or item�
Solid triangle ����������������������Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active�
Tab ��������������������������������������Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�
Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�
Source �������������������������������� Indicates the currently selected source�
Off Timer remaining time ����Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�
Slide bar ����������������������������� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�
ECO mode symbol �������������� Indicates ECO MODE is set�
Key Lock symbol ���������������� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�
Thermometer symbol ��������� Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too
high�
High Altitude symbol ���������� Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�
Wireless symbol �����������������Indicate the wireless LAN connection is enabled�
Source
Available buttons
Thermometer symbol
KeyLocksymbol
Off Timer remaining
time
Highlight
80
5. Using On-Screen Menu
List of Menu Items
Somemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.
MenuItem Default Options
SOURCE
COMPUTER1 *
COMPUTER2 *
HDMI *
VIDEO *
S-VIDEO *
VIEWER *
NETWORK *
USBDISPLAY *
ADJUST
PICTURE
PRESET * 1–7
DETAIL
SETTINGS
GENERAL
REFERENCE *
HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,
sRGB,DICOMSIM.
GAMMA
CORRECTION*
1
DYNAMIC,NATURAL,BLACKDETAIL
SCREENSIZE*
2
* LARGE,MEDIUM,SMALL
COLOR
TEMPERATURE
*
5000,6500,7800,8500,9300,10500
DYNAMIC
CONTRAST
*
OFF,ON
IMAGEMODE * STILL,MOVIE
WHITEBALANCE
CONTRASTR 0
CONTRASTG 0
CONTRASTB 0
BRIGHTNESSR 0
BRIGHTNESSG 0
BRIGHTNESSB 0
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
SHARPNESS
COLOR*
1
HUE
RESET
IMAGE
OPTIONS
CLOCK *
PHASE *
HORIZONTAL *
VERTICAL *
OVERSCAN *
0[%],5[%],10[%]
ASPECTRATIO
*
P420X/P350X:AUTO,4:3,16:9,15:9,16:10,WIDEZOOM,
NATIVE
*
P350W:AUTO,4:3,16:9,15:9,16:10,LETTERBOX,NATIVE
POSITION 0 (NotavailableonP350W)
AUDIO VOLUME 11 0 - 31
SETUP
GENERAL
KEYSTONE 0
KEYSTONESAVE OFF OFF,ON
WALLCOLOR OFF
OFF,WHITEBOARD,BLACKBOARD,BLACKBOARD
(GRAY),LIGHTYELLOW,LIGHTGREEN,LIGHTBLUE,
SKYBLUE,LIGHTROSE,PINK
ECOMODE AUTOECO OFF,AUTOECO,ECO1
CLOSEDCAPTION OFF
OFF,CAPTION1,CAPTION2,CAPTION3,CAPTION4,
TEXT1,TEXT2,TEXT3,TEXT4
OFFTIMER OFF OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
ENGLISH,DEUTSCH,FRANÇAIS,ITALIANO,ESPAÑOL,
SVENSKA,日本語
DANSK,PORTUGUÊS,ČEŠTINA,MAGYAR,POLSKI,
NEDERLANDS,SUOMI
NORSK,TÜRKÇE,РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어
ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी,
ไทย
MENU
COLORSELECT COLOR COLOR,MONOCHROME
SOURCEDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
IDDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
ECOMESSAGE OFF OFF,ON
DISPLAYTIME AUTO45SEC MANUAL,AUTO5SEC,AUTO15SEC,AUTO45SEC
BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE,BLACK,LOGO
FILTERMESSAGE OFF OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H]
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.
81
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SETUP
INSTALLATION
ORIENTATION
DESKTOP
FRONT
DESKTOPFRONT,CEILINGREAR,DESKTOPREAR,
CEILINGFRONT
CONTROLPANELLOCK OFF OFF,ON
SECURITY OFF OFF,ON
COMMUNICATIONSPEED 38400bps 4800bps,9600bps,19200bps,38400bps
REMOTESENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK
CONTROLID
CONTROLID
NUMBER
1 1–254
CONTROLID OFF OFF,ON
TESTPATTERN
NETWORKSETTINGS
WIREDLAN,WIRELESSLAN,WPS,NETWORK
INFORMATION,PROJECTORNAME,DOMAIN,ALERT
MAIL,NETWORKSERVICE
OPTIONS(1)
AUTOADJUST NORMAL OFF,NORMAL,FINE
FANMODE AUTO AUTO,HIGH,HIGHALTITUDE
SIGNALSELECT
COMPUTER1
RGB/
COMPONENT
RGB/COMPONENT,RGB,COMPONENT
COMPUTER2
RGB/
COMPONENT
RGB/COMPONENT,RGB,COMPONENT
VIDEO AUTO
AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
S-VIDEO AUTO
AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
WXGAMODE
P420X/P350X:
OFF
P350W:ON
OFF,ON
DEINTERLACE ON OFF,ON
HDMISETTINGS
VIDEOLEVEL AUTO AUTO,NORMAL,ENHANCED
AUDIOSELECT HDMI HDMI,COMPUTER2
BEEP ON OFF,ON
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATORMODE,PROGRAMTIMER,TIME,
MOUSE
OPTIONS(2)
STANDBYMODE NORMAL NORMAL,POWER-SAVING
AUTOPOWERON(AC) OFF OFF,ON
AUTOPOWERON(COMP1) OFF OFF,ON
AUTOPOWEROFF OFF OFF,0:05,0:10,0:20,0:30
DEFAULTSOURCESELECT LAST
LAST,AUTO,COMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,HDMI,VIDEO,
S-VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORK,USBDISPLAY
INFO.
USAGETIME
LAMPLIFEREMAINING
LAMPHOURSUSED
FILTERHOURSUSED
TOTALCARBONSAVINGS
SOURCE
SOURCENAME
SOURCEINDEX
HORIZONTALFREQUENCY
VERTICALFREQUENCY
SIGNALTYPE
VIDEOTYPE
SYNCTYPE
SYNCPOLARITY
SCANTYPE
WIREDLAN
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
WIRELESSLAN
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
SSID
NETWORKTYPE
WEP/WPA
CHANNEL
SIGNALLEVEL
VERSION(1)
FIRMWARE
DATA
VERSION(2) FIRMWARE2
OTHERS
PROJECTORNAME
MODELNO.
SERIALNUMBER
LANUNITTYPE
CONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]
isset)
RESET
CURRENTSIGNAL
ALLDATA
CLEARLAMPHOURS
CLEARFILTERHOURS
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
82
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]
COMPUTER 1 and 2
SelectsthecomputerconnectedtoyourCOMPUTER1orCOMPUTER2inputconnectorsignal.
NOTE:WhenthecomponentinputsignalisconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INorCOMPUTER2INconnector,select[COMPUTER1]
or[COMPUTER2]respectively.TheprojectorautomaticallydetermineswhethertheCOMPUTER1or2inputsignalisanRGBor
componentsignal.
HDMI
SelectstheHDMIcompatibleequipmentconnectedtoyourHDMIINconnector.
VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourVIDEOinput-VCR,DVDplayerordocumentcamera.
S-VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourS-VIDEOinput-VCRorDVDplayer.
NOTE:Aframemayfreezeforabriefperiodoftimewhenavideoisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindwithaVideoorS-
Videosource.
VIEWER
ThisfeatureenablesyoutomakepresentationsusingaUSBmemorythatcontainsslides.
(→page52“4.UsingtheViewer”)
NETWORK
SelectsasignalfromtheLANport(RJ-45)ortheinstalledUSBwirelessLANunit(optionalformodelsforEurope,
Australia,AsiaandothercountriesthanNorthAmerica).
USB DISPLAY
SelectsthecomputerconnectedtotheUSB(PC)port(typeB)byusingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable.
(→page34)
83
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]
[PICTURE]
[PRESET]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.
Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.
Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]toset
useradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.
Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values
DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
NOTE:
• The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.
• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-
ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).
Thestandardspecieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
84
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[GENERAL]
Storing Your Customized Settings [REFERENCE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].
First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-
TURE].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�
DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION]
Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:
DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�
NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�
BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
Selecting Screen Size for DICOM SIM [SCREEN SIZE]
Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.
LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 150"
MEDIUM
���������������� For screen size of 100"
SMALL
������������������� For screen size of 50"
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.
NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoadjustthecontrastratioopticallyusingthebuilt-iniris.
Toincreasethecontrastratio,select[ON].
Selecting Still Image Mode or Movie Mode [IMAGE MODE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectthestillimagemodeorthemoviemode.
STILL ��������������������� This mode is for a still image�
MOVIE ������������������� This mode is for a movie�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
Adjusting White Balance [WHITE BALANCE]
Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;
Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.
85
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[CONTRAST]
Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.
[BRIGHTNESS]
Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.
[SHARPNESS]
Controlsthedetailoftheimage.
[COLOR]
Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.
[HUE]
Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.
Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE
COMPUTER/HDMI(RGB) Yes Yes Yes No No
COMPUTER/HDMI(COMPONENT) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VIDEO/S-VIDEO/COMPONENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VIEWER/NETWORK/USBDISPLAY Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable
[RESET]
Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;
Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.
Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselected
willnotbereset.
86
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE]
ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.
CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�
PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)
Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�
NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.
87
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]
Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.
NOTE:The[HORIZONTAL]and[VERTICAL]itemsarenotavailableforVIDEO,S-VIDEO,HDMI,VIEWER,NETWORK,andUSB
DISPLAY.
- Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.
- Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthe
currentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,
itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.
 Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALL
DATA]andresettheadjustments.
Selecting Overscan Percentage [OVERSCAN]
Selectoverscanpercentage(0%,5%and10%)forsignal.
Projected image
Overscaned by 10%
NOTE:
• The[0[%]]cannotbeselectedwhenVIDEOandS-VIDEOsignalsareused.
• The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable:
•when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].
•when[VIEWER],[NETWORK],or[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[SOURCE]
88
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO]
Theterm“aspectratio”referstotheratioofwidthtoheightofaprojectedimage.
Theprojectorautomaticallydeterminestheincomingsignalanddisplaysitinitsappropriateaspectratio.
•Thistableshowstypicalresolutionsandaspectratiosthatmostcomputerssupport.
Resolution AspectRatio
VGA 640×480 4:3
SVGA
800×600 4:3
XGA
1024×768 4:3
WXGA
1280×768 15:9
WXGA
1280×800 16:10
WXGA+
1440×900 16:10
SXGA
1280×1024 5:4
SXGA+
1400×1050 4:3
UXGA
1600×1200 4:3
Options Function
AUTO
Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspect
ratio.(→ nextpage)
Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthis
occurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.
4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.
16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio.
15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio.
16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio.
WIDEZOOM
(P420X/P350X)
Theimageisstretchedleftandright.
Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenot
visible.
LETTERBOX
(P350W)
Theimageofaletterboxsignalisstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirections
totthescreen.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedatthetopandbottomedges
andthereforenotvisible.
NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputer
signalhasalowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.
[Example 1]Whentheincomingsig-
nalwiththeresolutionof800×600is
displayedontheP420X/P350X:
[Example 2]Whentheincomingsig-
nalwiththeresolutionof800×600is
displayedontheP350W:
NOTE:
• Whenanon-computersignalisdisplayed,the[NATIVE]isnotavailable.
• Whenasignalwithahigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolutionisdisplayed,[NATIVE]
isnotavailable.
89
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Sample image when the appropriate aspect ratio is automatically determined
P420X/P350X
[Computersignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sampleimagewhentheappro-
priate aspect ratiois automati-
callydetermined
[Videosignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sampleimage when the as-
pectratio is automaticallyde-
termined
NOTE:Todisplayasqueezedsignalprop-
erly,select[16:9]or[WIDEZOOM].
P350W
[Computersignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sampleimagewhentheappro-
priate aspect ratiois automati-
callydetermined
[Videosignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sampleimage when the as-
pectratio is automaticallyde-
termined
NOTE:Todisplayaletterboxsignalprop-
erly,select[LETTERBOX].
NOTE:Todisplayasqueezedsignalprop-
erly,select[16:9].
TIP:
• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.
• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect
ratioforavidesource.
Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formovielm.
• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [POSITION] (not available on P350W)
(onlywhen[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO])
When[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]isselectedin[ASPECTRATIO],theimageisdisplayedwithblackbordersonthetop
andbottom.
Youcanadjusttheverticalpositionfromthetoptothebottomoftheblackarea.
90
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[AUDIO]
Turning Up or Down Sound
AdjuststhevolumeoftheprojectorspeakerandAUDIOOUT(StereoMiniJack).
TIP:
• Whennomenusappear,the◀and▶buttonsontheprojectorcabinetandtheVOL.+/−buttonsontheremotecontrolworkas
avolumecontrol.(→page24)
91
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]
[GENERAL]
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually [KEYSTONE]
Youcancorrectverticaldistortionmanually.(→page22)
TIP:Whenthisoptionishighlighted,pressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplayitsslidebarforadjustment.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [KEYSTONE SAVE]
Thisoptionenablesyoutosaveyourcurrentkeystonesettings.
OFF ������������������������ Does not save current keystone correction settings� It will return your keystone correction settings to
“zero”�
ON ������������������������� Saves current keystone correction settings
Savingyourchangeonceaffectsallsources.Thechangesaresavedwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.
92
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]
Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.
NOTE:Selecting[WHITEBOARD]reduceslampbrightness.
Setting Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
TheECOMODEincreaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownonCO
2
emissions.
Threebrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF],[AUTOECO],and[ECO1]modes.
(→page28)
93
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Setting Closed Caption [CLOSED CAPTION]
ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideo
orS-Video.
OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�
CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�
TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�
NOTE:
• Theclosedcaptionisnotavailableunderthefollowingconditions:
- whenmessagesormenusaredisplayed.
- whenanimageismagnied,frozen,ormuted.
• Portionsofsuperimposedtextorclosedcaptionmaybetruncated.Ifthathappens,trytoplacethesuperimposedtextor
closedcaptionwithinthescreen.
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER]
1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.
2. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
3. Theremainingtimestartscountingdown.
4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.
NOTE:
• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.
• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3
MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE]
Youcanchooseoneof27languagesforon-screeninstructions.
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
[MENU]
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT]
Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.
Turning On / Off Source Display [SOURCE DISPLAY]
Thisoptionturns on or off input name displaysuchasCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,HDMI,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,
VIEWER,NETWORK,USBDISPLAY,tobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.
Whennoinputsignalispresent,theno-signalguidancepromptingyoutocheckforanavailableinputwillbedisplayed
atthecenterofthescreen.Whenthe[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]itemisselectedfor[SOURCE],theno-signalguid-
ancewillnotbedisplayed.
94
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY]
ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed�
Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE]
Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.
TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessage
topromptyoutoselect[AUTOECO]or[ECO1]for[ECOMODE].
When[AUTOECO]or[ECO1]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor
30seconds.
When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page28)
Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.
Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.The
presetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-
torypreset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND]
Use this feature to display a blue/black screenorlogo whennosignal isavailable.The defaultbackgroundis
[BLUE].
NOTE:
• Ifthe[LOGO]itemisselectedfor[BACKGROUND]withthe[NETWORK]or[USBDISPLAY]sourceselected,the[BLUE]itemwill
beselectedregardlessofitsselection.
• When[SOURCEDISPLAY]isturnedon,theno-signalguidancepromptingyoutocheckforanavailableinputwillbedisplayed
atthecenterofthescreenregardlessofitsselection.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Selecting Interval Time for Filter Message [FILTER MESSAGE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthelters.Clean
thelterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page143)
Fiveoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H]
Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
95
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[INSTALLATION]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION]
Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,
desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.
DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR
DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK]
ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.
NOTE:
• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.
• Whenthecontrolpanelislocked,pressingandholdingtheEXITbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforabout10secondswillchange
thesettingto[OFF].
TIP:Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.
Enabling Security [SECURITY]
ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.
Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page30)
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
96
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED]
ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to38400bps.The
defaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequip-
ment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).
NOTE:Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Turning On or Off Remote Sensor [REMOTE SENSOR]
Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.
Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,andBACK.
Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightor
strongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensoroftheprojector,changeanotheroption.
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID]
YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROL
IDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogether
usingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�
CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-
ting�
NOTE:
• When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupport
theCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
•PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControl
ID.
Assigning or Changing the Control ID
1. Turnontheprojector.
2. PresstheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be displayed. If the projector
cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive
projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3).
3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET
buttonontheremotecontrol.
Example:
To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.
No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote
control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.
TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.
4. ReleasetheIDSETbutton.
The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
•TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.
•Accidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrentlyspecied
IDwithbatteriesremoved.
97
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Using Test Pattern [TEST PATTERN]
Displaysthetestpatterntocheckforimagedistortionatthetimeoftheprojectorsetup.PresstheENTERbuttonto
displaythetestpattern;presstheEXITbuttontoclosethetestpatternandreturntothemenu.Menuoperationand
keystonecorrectionarenotpossiblewhenthetestpatternisdisplayed.
[NETWORKING SETTINGS]
See“APPLICATIONMENU”onpage107.
[OPTIONS(1)]
Setting Auto Adjust [AUTO ADJUST]
ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfor
noiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].
OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�
NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�
FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-
MAL]is selected�
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthreemodesforfanspeed:Automode,Highspeedmode,andHighAltitudemode.
AUTO ��������������������� The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature�
HIGH ���������������������� The built-in fans run at high speed�
HIGH ALTITUDE ����� The built-in fans run at a high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately
5500 feet/1600 meters or higher�
Whenyouwishtocooldownthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorquickly,select[HIGH].
NOTE:
• When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon willbedisplayedatthebottomofthemenu.
• ItisrecommendedthatyouselectHighspeedmodeifyouusetheprojectornon-stopforconsecutivedays.
•Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigher.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancause
theprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethe
lamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
•Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuch
asthelamp.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
98
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Signal Format [SIGNAL SELECT]
[COMPUTER1],[COMPUTER2]
Allowsyoutochoose[COMPUTER1],or[COMPUTER2]foranRGBsourcesuchasacomputer,or[COMPONENT]
foracomponentvideosourcesuchasaDVDplayer.Normallyselect[RGB/COMPONENT]andtheprojectorauto-
maticallydetectsacomponentsignal.Howevertheremaybesomecomponentsignalsthattheprojectorisunableto
detect.Ifthisisthecase,select[COMPONENT].
[VIDEO&S-VIDEOSystemSelect]
Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselectcompositevideostandardsautomaticallyormanually.
Normallyselect[AUTO]andtheprojectorwillautomaticallydetectthevideostandard.
Inthecasewheretheprojectorhasdifcultydetectingthevideostandard,selecttheappropriatevideostandardfrom
themenu.
ThismustbedoneforVIDEOandS-VIDEOrespectively.
Enabling or Disabling WXGA Mode [WXGA MODE]
Selecting[ON]willgiveprioritytoaWXGA(1280×768)signalinrecognizinganinputsignal.
When[WXGAMODE]issetto[ON],anXGA(1024×768)signalmaynotberecognizedonP420X/P350X.Inthis
case,select[OFF].
NOTE:
• The[OFF]isselectedatthetimeofshipmentofP420X/P350X.
• The[ON]isselectedatthetimeofshipmentofP350W.
Enabling the deinterlace [DEINTERLACE]
Turnsonoroffthedeinterlacefunctionforatelecinesignal.
OFF ������������������������ Select this option if there is any jitter or artifacts in video�
ON ������������������������� Default standard setting�
NOTE:ThisfeatureisnotavailableforHDTV(progressive)andcomputersignals.
Setting HDMI [HDMI SETTINGS]
MakethesettingsforvideolevelandaudiolevelwhenconnectingHDMIequipmentsuchasaDVDplayer.
VIDEO LEVEL ��������� Select [AUTO] to automatically detect video level� If automatic detection may not work well, select [NOR-
MAL] to disable the [ENHANCED] feature of your HDMI equipment or select [ENHANCED] to improve image
contrast and increase detail in the dark areas�
AUDIO SELECT ������ Select [HDMI] to switch the HDMI IN digital audio signal and select [COMPUTER 2] to switch the COMPUTER
2 input audio signal�
Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [BEEP]
Thisfeatureturnsonoroffthebuttonsoundoralarmwhenanerroroccursorthefollowingoperationsareper-
formed.
-Displayingthemainmenu
-Switchingsources
-Resettingdatabyusing[RESET]
-PressingPOWERONorPOWEROFFbutton
[TOOLS]
See“APPLICATIONMENU”onpage123.
99
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OPTIONS(2)]
Selecting Power-saving in [STANDBY MODE]
Theprojectorhastwostandbymodes:[NORMAL]and[POWER-SAVING].
ThePOWER-SAVINGmodeisthemodethatallowsyoutoputtheprojectorinthepower-savingconditionwhich
consumeslesspowerthantheNORMALmode.TheprojectorispresetforNORMALmodeatthefactory.
NORMAL ���������������� Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light
POWER-SAVING
���� Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off
The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode�
- MONITOR OUT (COMP� 1) connector, and AUDIO OUT connector
- LAN and Mail Alert functions
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
- Virtual Remote Tool, USB Display fucntion
NOTE:
• When[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[CONTROLID],or[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1)]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingis
notavailable.
• Evenwhen[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],poweronoroffcanbedonebyusingthePCCONTROLport.
• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO
2
emissionreduction.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Enabling Auto Power On [AUTO POWER ON(AC)]
Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.Thiseliminatesthe
needtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
100
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Turning On the Projector By Applying Computer Signal [AUTO POWER ON(COMP1)]
WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1
INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
ThisfunctionalityeliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet
topowerontheprojector.
Tousethisfunction,rstconnectacomputertotheprojectorandtheprojectortoanactiveACinput.
NOTE:
• Disconnectingacomputersignalfromthecomputerwillnotpowerofftheprojector.Werecommendusingthisfunctionincom-
binationoftheAUTOPOWEROFFfunction.
• Thisfunctionwillnotbeavailableunderthefollowingconditions:
- whenacomponentsignalisappliedtotheCOMPUTER1INconnector
- whenaSynconGreenRGBsignalorcompositesyncsignalisapplied
• ToenabletheAUTOPOWERON(COMP1)afterturningofftheprojector,wait3secondsandinputacomputersignal.
Ifacomputersignalisstillpresentwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,theAUTOPOWERON(COMP1)willnotworkandtheprojector
remainsinstandbymode.
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF]
Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:5min.,10min.,
20min.,30min.)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.
NOTE:
• The[AUTOPOWEROFF]functionwillnotworkwhen[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT]
Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
LAST ���������������������� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�
AUTO ��������������������� Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER1 → COMPUTER2 → HDMI → VIDEO → S-VIDEO →
VIEWER → USB DISPLAY →
COMPUTER1 and displays the first found source�
COMPUTER1 ��������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
COMPUTER2 ��������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
HDMI ��������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
VIDEO �������������������� Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
VIEWER ����������������� Displays slides or plays back movie files from the USB memory device every time the projector is turned
on�
NETWORK ������������� Displays a signal from LAN port (RJ-45) or the USB Wireless LAN Unit�
USB DISPLAY �������� Displays the computer signal from the USB (PC) port every time the projector is turned on�
101
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]
Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhassixpages.Theinformationincludedisas
follows:
TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMPLIFEREMAINING](%)*
[LAMPHOURSUSED](H)
[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)
[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)
* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.
Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFE
REMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.
Iftheremaininglamptimereaches0hours,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
• Themessagetotheeffectthatthelamportheltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhen
theprojectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.
Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.
Lamp life(H)
Replacement lamp Model
ECO MODE
NORMAL
(OFF or AUTO ECO)
ECO
(ECO1)
4000 5000
NP16LP P350X
3000 3500
NP17LP P420X/P350W
•
[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]
Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-
culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page29)
102
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE]
[SOURCENAME] [SOURCEINDEX]
[HORIZONTALFREQUENCY] [VERTICALFREQUENCY]
[SIGNALTYPE] [VIDEOTYPE]
[SYNCTYPE] [SYNCPOLARITY]
[SCANTYPE]
[WIRED LAN]
[IPADDRESS] [SUBNETMASK]
[GATEWAY] [MACADDRESS]
[WIRELESS LAN]
[IPADDRESS] [SUBNETMASK]
[GATEWAY] [MACADDRESS]
[SSID] [NETWORKTYPE]
[WEP/WPA] [CHANNEL]
[SIGNALLEVEL]
103
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[VERSION(1)]
[FIRMWARE]Version
[DATA]Version
[VERSION(2)]
[FIRMWARE2]Version
[OTHERS]
[PROJECTORNAME]
[MODELNO.]
[SERIALNUMBER]
[LANUNITTYPE]
[CONTROLID](when[CONTROLID]isset)
104
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]
TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)except
thefollowing:
[CURRENTSIGNAL]
Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.
Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],
[ASPECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].
[ALLDATA]
Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.
AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[SECURITY],[COMMUNI-
CATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURS
USED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].
Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]
Resetsthelampclockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
NOTE:Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthe
lamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Inthisconditionyoucannotclearthelamphourmeteronthemenu.Ifthishappens,pressthe
HELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.Dothisonlyafterreplacingthelamp.
Clearing the Filter Usage Hours [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]
Resetsthelterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneed
toclearthelterusagehour.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
105
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❾ Application Menu
When[NETWORK]isselectedfromthe[SOURCE]menu,theapplicationmenu[APPLICATIONMENU]willbedis-
played.
TheapplicationmenuallowsyoutosetuptheUserSupportware,NetworkSettings(NETWORKSETTINGS)and
Tools(TOOLS).
TheUserSupportwareiscontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
In[ADMINISTRATORMODE],either[ADVANCED]menuor[BASIC]menucanbeselected.(→page123)
The[BASIC]menucontainsminimumessentialsofmenusandcommands.
IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITY
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseImage
ExpressUtility.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY
Thisallowsyoutosetupforpasswordentry/deletion,computersearchingandIPaddressonnetwork(wired/wireless)
whicharerequiredtouseDesktopControlUtility.
106
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK PROJECTOR
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseNetwork
Projector.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION
ThisallowsyoutosetupforcomputernameentryandeffectsforRemoteDesktop.
NOTE:
• AUSBkeyboardisrequiredtosetuptheRemoteDesktopConnection.
107
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK SETTINGS
Important:
• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.
• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→page
138)
TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
Hints on How to Set Up LAN Connection
To set up the projector for a LAN connection:
Select[WIREDLAN]or[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].
TwosettingscanbesetforwiredorwirelessLAN.
Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpressthe
ENTERbutton.(→page108)
To recall LAN settings stored in the profile number:
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredorwirelessLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
(→page108)
To connect a DHCP server:
Turnon[DHCP]forwiredorwirelessLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithout
usingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page109)
To set only for wireless LAN (NETWORK TYPE and WEP/WPA):
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwirelessLAN,andthenselect[ADVANCED]and[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.TheAdvancedmenuwillbedisplayed.(→page110)
To select an SSID:
Select[ADVANCED]→[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
SelectanSSIDandpressthe>buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Ifyoudonotuse[SITESURVEY],typetheSSIDandselect[INFRASTRUCTURE]or[ADHOC].(→page110)
To receive lamp replacement time or error messages via e-mail:
Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].
Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page121)
To execute [EASY CONNECTION] using Image Express Utility 2.0 or Image Express Utility 2 for Mac:
The[EASYCONNECTION]isamodethatcanabbreviatethetroublesomeLANsettingswhenusingtheImage
ExpressUtilityandconnectingthePCandprojectorviaawirelessLAN.
TheImageExpressUtilityLite,ImageExpressUtility2.0,andImageExpressUtility2forMacarecontainedonthe
suppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
Touse[EASYCONNECTION],select[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].
NOTE:The[EASYCONNECTION]functionisavailableonWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPSP3.
108
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WIRED LAN or WIRELESS LAN (ADVANCED menu only)
PROFILES • UptotwosettingsfortheLANportorUSBwirelessLANunit
canbestoredinmemoryoftheprojector.Totaloffoursettings
canbestored.
Fivesettingscanbestored:twoforthebuilt-inLANport,two
forwirelessLANandoneforWPS.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor
[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.
Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.This
willstoreyoursettingsinmemory.
• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory:
Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-
FILES]list.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
• Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility
2.0orImageExpressUtility2forMac,select[WIRELESSLAN]
→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].
• TostopemittingradiowavesfromtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,
select[DISABLE]fromthe[PROFILES]list.
• Selecting[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]willallowtheprojectorto
createaninfrastructurenetwork.
AnSSIDwillbeautomaticallycreated.
WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectorischanged,itwillauto-
maticallytakeeffectinoneortwominutes.
Select“ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically”tosettheIPad-
dressofaconnectedcomputer.
Ittakesafewsecondsforachangeofyourcomputer’sIPad-
dresstocomeintoeffectinWindows7/WindowsVistawhileit
takesoneortwominutesinWindowXP.
When youconnectwith yourcomputer tosaveyour prole
andselect“Automaticallyconnectwhenwithinrange”fromthe
PropertiestabofWirelessNetworkinWindowsforyourselected
prole,yourwirelessLANwillbeaccessedunderthefollowing
conditions:
• atthetimeofturningonthecomputerortheprojector
• whenthenotebooktypeiswithintherangeoftheprojector’s
wirelessLANcanbeachieved.
DatatransmissionbetweenwirelessLANandwiredLANisnot
possible.
Whenthe[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]modeisusedtosend
images,itisrecommendedtoconnecttoonlyonecomputer.
—
109
5. Using On-Screen Menu
• Whenselecting[WPS],thenetworkwillbeconnectedbyusing
settingsstoredautomaticallywiththeWPSfunction.
Selecting[WPS]willallowtheprojectortoaccessthenetwork
byusingthesettingstheWPSfunctionautomaticallystored.
DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstothe
projectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmask
numberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.
—
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtothe
projectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
GATEWAY
Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
WNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyour
DNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserver
connectedtotheprojector.
Upto12numeric
characters
DNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.
Upto12numeric
characters
ADVANCED*
ThismenuallowsyoutosetvariousitemsforyourwirelessLAN
connection(networktype,security).
—
RECONNECT
Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhave
changed[PROFILES].
—
*The[ADVANCED]settingscreenisavailablefor[WIRELESSLAN]only.
NOTE:
• Ifyouselect[EASYCONNECTION]from[PROFILES],youcannotmakesettingstoDHCPanditsfollowingitemsexcept[CHAN-
NEL]in[ADVANCED].
ADVANCED Setting (required for wireless LAN only) (ADVANCED menu only)
110
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.Select
anSSIDwhichyoucanaccess.
ToselectanSSID,highlight[SSID]andusetheSELECT→ to
select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
����������������������� Wireless access point
����������������������� Ad Hoc PC
����������������������� WEP or WPA enabled
—
SECURITY
Thiswillturnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmis-
sion.
Touseencryption,specifyaWEPkeyorencryptionkey.Select
yoursecuritytypeappropriateforyourcomputerandthewire-
lessLANunit.
DISABLE ���������������� Will not turn on the encryption feature� Your com-
munications may be monitored by someone�
WEP(64bit) ������������ Uses 64-bit datalength for secure transmis-
sion�
WEP(128bit) ���������� Uses 128-bit datalength for secure transmission�
This option will increase privacy and security
when compared to use of 64-bit datalength en-
cryption�
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP
������������������������������ These options provide stronger security than
WEP�
NOTE:
• Thesecuritytype,WEPkey,andencryptionkeysettingsmustbethe
sameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointinyour
wirelessnetwork.
• Whenyouuse[SECURITY],yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslow
down.
• [WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK]and[WPA2-EAP]arenotavail-
ablewhen[ADHOC]isselectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
—
SSID
Enteranidentier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcan
bedoneonlywithequipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyour
wirelessLAN.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters(case
sensitive).
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE ���Select this option when communicating with
one or more equipment connected to the wire-
less or wired LAN network via a wireless access
point�
AD HOC ��������������������Select this option when using the wireless LAN
to directly communicate with a computer in
peer-to-peer mode�
—
CHANNEL
Select a channel. Available channels vary depending on the
countryandregion.Whenyouselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],make
surethattheprojectorandyouraccesspointareonthesame
channel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojector
andyourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
—
111
5. Using On-Screen Menu
When [WEP(64bit)] or [WEP(128bit)] is selected for [SECURITY TYPE]
KEYSELECT SelectsoneWEPkeyfromthefourkeysbelow.
KEY1,KEY2,KEY3,
KEY4
EnteraWEPkey.
• Maximum number of characters
Option Alphanumeric(ASCII) Hexadecimal(HEX)
WEP64bit 5 10
WEP128bit 13 26
When [WPA-PSK], [WPA-EAP], [WPA2-PSK], or [WPA2-EAP] is selected for [SECURITY TYPE]
ENCRYPTIONTYPE Select[TKIP]or[AES].
KEY Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
112
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[AUTHENTICATION] (required for wireless only)
SettingisrequiredforusingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
Preparation before setting
SelectawirelessLANcompliantWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPauthenticationandinstalladigitalcerticateontheprojec-
tor.
1. Set[DATEANDTIME]ontheprojector.(→page127)
2. Useacomputertosavedigitalcerticates(les)forWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPsettingtoyourUSBmemory
device.
After completing saving the file, remove the USB memory device from the computer.
Important:
• TheleformatsofdigitalcerticatethataresupportedbytheprojectorareDERandPKCS#12only.
• Theprojectorcannothandleanydigitalcerticatewhoselesizeexceeds8KB.
• CRL(CerticateRelocationList)isnotsupported.
• Clientcerticatechainisnotsupported.
3. PlugtheUSBmemorydeviceintotheUSBportoftheprojector.
Setting Procedures
1. Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSSLAN].
2. SetitemssuchasPROFILES,DHCP,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASKandothersasrequired.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]for[PROFILES].If[EASYCONNECTION]isselected,WPA-PSK,WPA2-
PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is not available.
3. Select[ADVANCED]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ADVANCED] setting screen will be displayed.
113
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Select[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The “SSID” list will be displayed.
5. SelectaconnectingSSID,andthenselect[OK].
Finally press the ENTER button.
• SelecttheSSIDforwhichWPA-PSKorWPA2-PSKisset.
• Select[INFRASTRUCTURE( )] for [NETWORK TYPE]. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is
not available when [AD HOC ( )] is selected.
6. Selectthe[SECURITY]tab.
The [SECURITY] page will be displayed.
7. Selectthe[SECURITYTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
8. Select[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
9. Selectthe[TKIP/AES]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
10
.Select[TKIP]or[AES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Select [TKIP] or [AES] according to the setting for your access point.
114
5. Using On-Screen Menu
11
.Selectthe[AUTHENTICATION]tab.
The [AUTHENTICATION] page will be displayed.
Select either [EAP-TLS] or [PEAP-MSCHAPv2] for [EAP TYPE]. The setting items vary depending on the EAP
type.
See the table below.
EAPType SettingItem Note
EAP-TLS
UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
ClientCerticate PKCS#12formatle
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
PEAP-MSCHAPv2 UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
Password
1characterormoreand32charactersor
less
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
① Selecting [EAP-TLS] for [EAP TYPE]:
The following section explains the operation for selecting [EAP-TLS].
For selecting [PEAP-MSCHAPv2], go on to Step 12 on page 116.
12.
Selectthe[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setausername.
• Ausernamemustbe1characterormoreand32charactersorless.
• Seepage26of“WiredandWirelessNetworkSetupGuide”forusingthesoftwarekeyboardtoentercharac-
ters.
115
5. Using On-Screen Menu
13.
Select[CLIENTCERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
A list of files (thumbnail screen) will be displayed.
• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installing a digital certificate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-lebasis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
14.
Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(PKCS#12formatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
The password screen will be displayed.
15.
Select[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setthepasswordoftheprivatekey.Apassword
must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less.
The selected digital certificate file will be installed on the projector.
• WhentherootCAcerticateisnotincludedinthelethatwasselectedinStep14,proceedtoStep16.When
the root certification authority certificate is included, proceed to Step 18.
16.Select[CACERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
116
5. Using On-Screen Menu
17.
Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [WIRELESS] page will be returned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearing the digital certicate that is installed on the projector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
• ThePKCS#12formatdigitalcerticateincludingaCAcerticatewillbeinstalledasarootCAcerticate.
② Selecting [PEAP-MSCHAPv2] for [EAP TYPE]:
12.
Fromthe[AUTHENTICATION]page,select[EAPTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
13.
Select[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]andpresstheENTERbutton.
14.
Select[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setausername.
• Ausernamemustbe32charactersorless.
(→ page 118)
117
5. Using On-Screen Menu
15.
Aftercompletingsettingausername,selectthe[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setapassword.
• Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.
16.
Aftercompletingsettingthepassword,select[CACERTIFICATE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installing a digital certificate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-le
basis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
17.
Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
118
5. Using On-Screen Menu
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [WIRELESS] page will be returned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearing the digital certicate that is installed on the projector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
Entering WEP keys (Switching between Alphanumeric characters and hexadecimal)
Toenterfrom[KEY1]to[KEY4],dothefollowing:
1. Selectoneof[KEY1],[KEY2],[KEY3]and[KEY4]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.
2. Usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectacharacterandpresstheENTERbutton.
• ToenteraWEPkeyorpassphrase,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII)orhexadecimal(HEX).ToenteraPSK
key,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII).
• Pressthe[HEX]buttontochangeto[ASCII]tosetthekeyinASCIIdigit.Youcantogglethisbuttonbetween
[ASCII] and [HEX].
• Enter0x(numeralandalphabetrespectively)rightinfrontofyourkeycode.
• Hexadecimaluses0to9andAtoF.
3. AfterenteringyourWEPkeyorpassphrase,usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbeclosed.
119
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WPS
WhenthewirelessLANaccesspointconnectedtotheprojectorsupportsWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetupTM),youcan
usePINmethodorpushbuttonmethodtosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
PINTYPE Seta4-digitor8digit-PINcodeofWPSforyouraccesspointtocompletesettingforthe
SSIDsecurity.
PUSHBUTTONTYPE Pressthededicatedbuttonoftheaccesspointandtheprojector’swirelessLANunitto
completesettingfortheSSIDsecurity.
NETWORK INFORMATION
Thefollowinginformationwillbedisplayedwhentheprojectorisconnectedtoanetwork(wired LANorwireless
LAN).
PROJECTORNAME
HOSTNAME
DOMAIN
NETWORKINFOR-
MATION(WIRED
LAN/WIRELESSLAN)
CONNECTIONSTATUS,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASK,GATEWAY,WINS,DNS,MAC
ADDRESS,SSID,NETWORKTYPE,WEP/WPA,CHANNEL,SIGNALLEVEL,AU-
THENTICATION,AUTHENTICATIONPERIOD
DISPLAYTHEINFOR-
MATIONINAPPLICA-
TIONMENU
Turnonoroffthedisplayofthenetworkinformation.
Themeaningsofthesestatusstatementsaredescribedbelow.
Statement Authenticationstatus
Authenticated Authenticationisdonecorrectly.
Failure Authenticationfailed.
Authenticating… Authenticationisinprocess.
Expired Thedigitalcerticateisexpired.Or[DATE,TIMEPRESET]isnotsetcorrectly.
TimeError The[DATE,TIMEPRESET]hasbeencleared.Setthecorrectdateandtime.
120
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROJECTOR NAME (ADVANCED menu only)
PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
DOMAIN (ADVANCED menu only)
Setahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.
HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric
characters
121
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ALERT MAIL (ADVANCED menu only)
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerror
messagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�
Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�
Sample of a message to be sent from the projector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Please
replacethelampandlters.
ProjectorName:NECProjector
LampHoursUsed:100[H]
—
HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
SENDER'SAD-
DRESS
Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
SMTPSERVER
NAME
TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
RECIPIENT'SAD-
DRESS1,2,3
Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
mericcharactersand
symbols
TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.
NOTE:
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceivean
Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient’s Address is
correctlyset.
• Unless any one of the [SENDER'S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER'S
NAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]is
notavailable.
• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting
[TESTMAIL].
—
122
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK SERVICE (ADVANCED menu only)
HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
PJLink
This option allowsyou toset apassword when youuse the
PJLinkfeature.
NOTE:
• Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,
consultwithyourdealer.
• WhatisPJLink?
PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors
ofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardprotocolisestablishedby
JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-
tion(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom
themenu.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters
AMX
TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhen
connectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrol
system.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinx
controlsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriate
DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device
Discovery�
Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX
Device Discovery�
—
123
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATOR MODE
ThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.
MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.
(→page80)
—
NOTSAVESETTING
VALUES
Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�
Clear this check box to save your projector settings�
—
NEWPASSWORD/
CONFIRMPASS-
WORD
Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
TIP:
ToreturntotheADVANCEDmenufromtheBASICmenu,dothefollowing:
1. UsetheSOURCEbuttononthecabinetorpresstheNETWORKbuttonontheremotecontroltoselect
[NETWORK]todisplaytheAPPLICATIONMENU.
2. Select[TOOLS]→[ADMINISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE]→[ADVANCEDMODE].
124
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROGRAM TIMER
Thisoptionturnson/offtheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecied
time.
NOTE:
• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→page127)
• MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected.
• Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemain
powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,thebuilt-inclockstopsworking.
Setting a new program timer
1. OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usetheSELECT▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTER
button.
The [PROGRAM LIST] screen will be displayed.
2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.
The [EDIT] screen will be displayed.
3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.
ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�
DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-
FRI]�To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�
125
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�
FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by
setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [SOURCE] will allow you to select a video source by setting
[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select [EC MODE] by setting [ADVANCED
SETTINGS]�
ADVANCED SETTINGS
������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�
REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the
check mark�
4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This will complete the settings.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.
5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.
6. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.
NOTE:
• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.
• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.
• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.
• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe
clearedautomaticallyandtheprogramwillbedisabled.
• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.
• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.
• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.
• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted
untilthepoweroffbecomespossible.
• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris
enabled.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit
manuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.
126
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Activating the program timer
1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ENABLE] will be activated.
2. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [PROGRAM TIMER] screen will be changed to the [TOOL] screen.
NOTE:
• Clearing[ENABLE]willdisabletheProgramTimerevenwhenaprogramismarkedwithacheckmarkon[PROGRAMLIST]
screen.
• When[ENABLE]isselected,the[PROGRAMLIST]cannotbeedited.Toedittheprograms,select[ENABLE]toturnofftheProgram
Timer.
Changing the programmed settings
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.
2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.
3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The programmed settings will be changed.
You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.
Changing the order of programs
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpresstheSELECT
▶ button.
2. PresstheSELECT▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.
The order of the programs will be changed.
Deleting the programs
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpresstheSELECT▶
button.
2. PresstheSELECT▼buttontoselect[DELETE].
3. PresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The program will be deleted.
This will complete deleting the program.
127
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DATE ANDTIME
Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.
NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthe
mainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.The
built-inclockwillnotceasewhileinthestandbymode.
TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�
INTERNET TIME SERVER ��������� If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet
time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�
UPDATE ������������������������������������ Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available
unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�
SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�
MOUSE
ThisoptionletsyoutochangeyourUSBmousesettings.ThemousesettingsfeatureisavailableforUSBmouseonly.
Choosethesettingsyouwant:
MOUSE BUTTON ���������������������� [RIGHT HAND] or [LEFT HAND]
MOUSE SENSITIVITY
��������������� [FAST], [MEDIUM] or [SLOW]
128
6. Installation and Connections
3
2
1
Thissectiondescribeshowtosetupyourprojectorandhowtoconnectvideoandaudiosources.
Yourprojectorissimpletosetupanduse.Butbeforeyougetstarted,youmustrst:
z Setupascreenandtheprojector.
x Connectyourcomputerorvideoequipment
totheprojector.
(→page132, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138)
c
Connect the supplied power cord.
(→page13)
NOTE:
• Ensurethatthepowercordandanyothercablesare
disconnected before moving the projector. When
movingtheprojectororwhenitisnotinuse,cover
thelenswiththeslidinglenscover.
• Anoptionalcablecover(NP01CV)isavailable.Refer
topage142forattachingthecablecover.
1 Setting Up the Screen and the Projector
Selecting a Location
[P420X/P350X]
Thefurtheryourprojectorisfromthescreenorwall,thelargertheimage.Theminimumsizetheimagecanbeis
approximately25"(0.64m)measureddiagonallywhentheprojectorisroughly35inches(0.9m)fromthewallor
screen.Thelargesttheimagecanbeis300"(7.6m)whentheprojectorisabout435inches(11.0m)fromthewall
orscreen.
300"
240"
Distance
(Unit: m/inch)
Lens center
Screen Size
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
200"
180"
150"
120"
100"
80"
11.0/435
"
8.8/348
"
6.6/260
"
5.5/216
"
4.4/173
"
3.6/144
"
2.9/115
"
2.2/86
"
1.4/57
"
40"
7.3/289
"
60"
30"
25"
1.1/
42
"
0.9/
35
"
609.6(W)�457.2(H) / 240(W)�180(H)
487.7(W)�365.8(H) / 192(W)�144(H)
406.4(W)�304.8(H) / 160(W)�120(H)
304.8(W)�228.6(H) / 120(W)�90(H)
365.8(W)�274.3(H) / 144(W)�108(H)
243.8(W)�182.9(H) / 96(W)�72(H)
203.2(W)�152.4(H) / 80(W)�60(H)
162.6(W)�121.9(H) / 64(W)�48(H)
121.9(W)�91.4(H) / 48(W)�36(H)
81.3(W)�61.0(H) / 32(W)�24(H)
61.0(W)�45.7(H) / 24(W)�18(H)
50.8(W)�38.1(H) / 20(W)�15(H)
TIP:
• Thedistancesareindicatedbyintermediatevaluesbetweenteleandwide.Useasaruleofthumb.
• Formoredetailsonthrowdistance,seepage130.
To the wall outlet.
129
6. Installation and Connections
[P350W]
Thefurtheryourprojectorisfromthescreenorwall,thelargertheimage.Theminimumsizetheimagecanbeis
approximately25"(0.64m)measureddiagonallywhentheprojectorisroughly37inches(0.9m)fromthewallor
screen.Thelargesttheimagecanbeis300"(7.6m)whentheprojectorisabout459inches(11.7m)fromthewall
orscreen.
300"
240"
Distance
(Unit: m/inch)
Lens center
Screen Size
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
200"
180"
150"
120"
100"
80"
11.7/459
"
9.3/367
"
7.0/275
"
5.8/229
"
4.6/183
"
3.9/152
"
3.1/121
"
2.3/90
"
1.5/60
"
40"
7.8/306
"
60"
30"
25"
1.1/
45
"
0.9/
37
"
646.2(W)�403.9(H) / 254(W)�159(H)
516.9(W)�323.1(H) / 204(W)�127(H)
430.8(W)�269.2(H) / 170(W)�106(H)
323.1(W)�201.9(H) / 127(W)�79(H)
387.7(W)�242.3(H) / 153(W)�95(H)
258.5(W)�161.5(H) / 102(W)�64(H)
215.4(W)�134.6(H) / 85(W)�53(H)
172.3(W)�107.7(H) / 68(W)�42(H)
129.2(W)�80.8(H) / 51(W)�32(H)
86.2(W)�53.8(H) / 34(W)�21(H)
64.6(W)�40.4(H) / 25(W)�16(H)
53.8(W)�33.7(H) / 21(W)�13(H)
TIP:
• Thedistancesareindicatedbyintermediatevaluesbetweenteleandwide.Useasaruleofthumb.
• Formoredetailsonthrowdistance,seepage130.
130
6. Installation and Connections
C
α
B
D
Throw Distance and Screen Size
Thefollowingshowstheproperrelativepositionsoftheprojectorandscreen.Refertothetabletodeterminethe
positionofinstallation.
Distance Chart
B= Vertical distance between lens center and
screencenter
C= Throwdistance
D= Vertical distance between lens center and
screenbottom(topofscreenforceilingap-
plication)
α= Throwangle
NOTE:The values inthe tables aredesign values and
mayvary.
[P420X/P350X]
Screen Size
B
C
D
α
Diagonal Width Height wide tele wide tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
25 635 20 508 15 381 0–8 0–191 25 643 - 43 1102 -8–0 -191–0
0�0–16�5 - 0�0–9�8
30 762 24 610 18 457 0–9 0–229 31 782 - 52 1333 -9–0 -229–0 0�0–16�3 - 0�0–9�7
40 1016 32 813 24 610 0–12 0–305 42 1060 - 71 1794 -12–0 -305–0 0�0–16�0 - 0�0–9�6
60 1524 48 1219 36 914 0–18 0–457 64 1616 - 107 2717 -18–0 -457–0 0�0–15�8 - 0�0–9�6
72 1829 58 1463 43 1097 0–22 0–549 77 1950 - 129 3271 -22–0 -549–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
80 2032 64 1626 48 1219 0–24 0–610 86 2172 - 143 3641 -24–0 -610–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
84 2134 67 1707 50 1280 0–25 0–640 90 2284 - 151 3825 -25–0 -640–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
90 2286 72 1829 54 1372 0–27 0–686 96 2450 - 161 4102 -27–0 -686–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
100 2540 80 2032 60 1524 0–30 0–762 107 2728 - 180 4564 -30–0 -762–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
120 3048 96 2438 72 1829 0–36 0–914 129 3285 - 216 5487 -36–0 -914–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
150 3810 120 3048 90 2286 0–45 0–1143 162 4119 - 271 6872 -45–0 -1143–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
180 4572 144 3658 108 2743 0–54 0–1372 195 4953 - 325 8256 -54–0 -1372–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
200 5080 160 4064 120 3048 0–60 0–1524 217 5509 - 361 9180 -60–0 -1524–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
210 5334 168 4267 126 3200 0–63 0–1600 228 5787 - 380 9641 -63–0 -1600–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
240 6096 192 4877 144 3658 0–72 0–1829 261 6621 - 434 11026 -72–0 -1829–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
270 6858 216 5486 162 4115 0–81 0–2057 294 7456 - 489 12411 -81–0 -2057–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
300 7620 240 6096 180 4572 0–90 0–2286 326 8290 - 543 13795 -90–0 -2286–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
[P350W]
Screen Size
B
C
D
α
Diagonal Width Height wide tele wide tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
25 635 21 538 13 337 0–8 0–202 27 682 - 46 1167 -7–1 -168–34
0�0–16�5 - 0�0–9�8
30 762 25 646 16 404 0–10 0–242 33 829 - 56 1411 -8–2 -202–40 0�0–16�3 - 0�0–9�7
40 1016 34 862 21 538 0–13 0–323 44 1123 - 75 1898 -11–2 -269–54 0�0–16�1 - 0�0–9�7
60 1524 51 1292 32 808 0–19 0–485 67 1710 - 113 2873 -16–3 -404–81 0�0–15�8 - 0�0–9�6
72 1829 61 1551 38 969 0–23 0–582 81 2063 - 136 3458 -19–4 -485–97 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
80 2032 68 1723 42 1077 0–25 0–646 90 2298 - 151 3848 -21–4 -538–108 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
84 2134 71 1809 45 1131 0–27 0–678 95 2415 - 159 4043 -22–4 -565–113 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
90 2286 76 1939 48 1212 0–29 0–727 102 2591 - 171 4336 -24–5 -606–121 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
100 2540 85 2154 53 1346 0–32 0–808 114 2885 - 190 4823 -26–5 -673–135 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
120 3048 102 2585 64 1615 0–38 0–969 137 3472 - 228 5799 -32–6 -808–162 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
150 3810 127 3231 79 2019 0–48 0–1212 171 4354 - 286 7261 -40–8 -1010–202 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
180 4572 153 3877 95 2423 0–57 0–1454 206 5235 - 343 8724 -48–10 -1212–242 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
200 5080 170 4308 106 2692 0–64 0–1615 229 5822 - 382 9699 -53–11 -1346–269 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
210 5334 178 4523 111 2827 0–67 0–1696 241 6116 - 401 10187 -56–11 -1414–283 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
240 6096 204 5169 127 3231 0–76 0–1939 275 6997 - 459 11649 -64–13 -1615–323 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
270 6858 229 5816 143 3635 0–86 0–2181 310 7878 - 516 13112 -72–14 -1817–363 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
300 7620 254 6462 159 4039 0–95 0–2423 345 8759 - 574 14575 -79–16 -2019–404 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
Screencenter
Lenscenter
Screenbottom
131
6. Installation and Connections
WARNING
* Installingyourprojectorontheceilingmustbedone
byaqualiedtechnician.ContactyourNECdealerfor
moreinformation.
* Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.
• Onlyuseyourprojectoronasolid,levelsurface.Ifthe
projectorfallstotheground,youcanbeinjuredand
theprojectorseverelydamaged.
• Do notuse the projector where temperatures vary
greatly.Theprojectormustbeusedattemperatures
between41°F(5°C)and104°F(40°C)(Ecomodese-
lectedautomaticallyat95°Fto104°F/35°Cto40°C).
• Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke.Thiswillharmthescreenimage.
• Ensurethatyouhaveadequateventilationaroundyour
projectorsoheatcandissipate.Donotcoverthevents
onthesideorthefrontoftheprojector.
Reecting the Image
Usingamirrortoreectyourprojector’simageenables
youtoenjoyamuchlargerimagewhenasmallerspace
isrequired.ContactyourNECdealerifyouneedamirror
system.Ifyou’reusingamirrorsystemandyourimage
isinverted,usetheMENUandbuttonsonyour
projectorcabinetoryourremotecontroltocorrectthe
orientation.(→page95)
132
6. Installation and Connections
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO IN
HDMI IN
USB(PC)
Computer cable (VGA) (supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the
projector. It is recommended that you use a
commercially available distribution amplifier
if connecting a signal cable longer than the
cable supplied.
A commercially available
USB cable
(compatible with USB 2.0
specifications)
NOTE:ForMacintosh,useacommerciallyavail-
ablepinadapter(notsupplied)toconnectto
yourMac’svideoport.
Stereo mini-plug
audio cable (not
supplied)
Making Connections
NOTE:WhenusingwithanotebookPC,besuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymode
andbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.
InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.
* Ifthescreengoesblankwhileusingyourremotecontrol,itmaybetheresultofthecomputer’sscreen-saverorpowermanage-
mentsoftware.
Enabling the computer’s external display
DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.
WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.
Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon
oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough
externaldisplayselections.
Connecting Your Computer
NOTE:SignalssupportedbyPlug&Play(DDC2)
INPUT
COMPUTER 1 IN COMPUTER 2 IN HDMI
analog analog digital
Yes Yes Yes
HDMI cable (not supplied)
Use High Speed HDMI
®
Cable.
NOTE:
• When[VIEWER],[NETWORK],or[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[SOURCE],soundfromtheCOMPUTER2AUDIOINminijack
willbeoutputthroughthespeaker.
133
6. Installation and Connections
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTER1IN COMPUTER1 (COMPUTER1)
COMPUTER2IN COMPUTER2 (COMPUTER2)
HDMIIN HDMI HDMI
USB(PC) USBDISPLAY (USBDISPLAY)
NOTE:TheprojectorisnotcompatiblewithvideodecodedoutputsoftheNECISS-6020switcher.
NOTE:AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackviaacommerciallyavailablescan
converter.
Thisisbecausetheprojectorwillprocessavideosignalasacomputersignalatthedefaultsetting.Inthatcase,dothefollowing.
* Whenanimageisdisplayedwiththelowerandupperblackportionofthescreenoradarkimageisnotdisplayedcorrectly:
ProjectanimagetollthescreenandthenpresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet.
NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal
• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-
dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.
• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.
• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC.
Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,
restartyourPC.
• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormay
resultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromthedigitaloutputofthegraphicscard.
• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojectorisrunning.Ifthesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthen
reconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.
NOTE:When[VIEWER],[NETWORK],or[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[SOURCE],soundfromtheCOMPUTER2AUDIOINmini
jackwillbeoutputthroughthespeaker.
NOTE:HDMIinputsignal
DisconnectingandconnectingtheHDMIcablemayresultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromtheHDMIequipmentwhiletheprojec-
torisrunning.
Shouldthishappen,selecttheHDMIinputagain.
<TwowaystoselecttheHDMIinput>
• PresstheHDMIbuttonontheremotecontrol.
• PresstheMENUbuttonontheprojectorcabinet,thenselect[HDMI]from[SOURCE].
134
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting an External Monitor
Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputer
analogimageyou’reprojecting.
NOTE:
• Daisychainconnectionisnotpossible.
• Whenaudioequipmentisconnected,theprojectorspeakerisdisabled.
AUDIO
IN
PHONE
MONITOR OUT (COMP. 1)
AUDIO OUT
Com-
puter cable
(VGA)
(supplied)
Stereo mini-plug audio cable
(not supplied)
Computer cable (VGA)
(not supplied)
135
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your DVD Player or Other AV Equipment
ConnectingVideo/S-VideoInput
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
VIDEOIN
VIDEO
(VIDEO)
S-VIDEOIN
S-VIDEO
(S-VIDEO)
NOTE:TheAUDIOINLandRjacks(RCA)aresharedbetweentheVideoandS-Videoinputs.
NOTE:RefertoyourVCRowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourequipment’svideooutputrequirements.
NOTE:AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindvia
ascanconverter.
AUDIO OUTVIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO LR
AUDIO IN
LR
S-VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
Audio cable (not supplied)
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
Audio cable (not supplied)
136
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Component Input
 Acomponentsignalwillbeautomaticallydisplayed.Ifnot,fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→
[SIGNALSELECT]→[COMPUTER1]or[COMPUTER2],andthenplaceacheckmarkintheComponentradio
button.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTER1IN COMPUTER1 (COMPUTER1)
COMPUTER2IN COMPUTER2 (COMPUTER2)
NOTE:RefertoyourDVDplayer’sowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourDVDplayer’svideooutputrequirements.
AUDIOIN
LR
AUDIOOUT
L R
Component
Y Cb Cr
AUDIOIN
COMPUTER1IN
Audio cable (not supplied)
15-pin - to - RCA (fe-
male) × 3 cable adapter
(ADP-CV1E)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio
cable (not supplied)
Component video RCA × 3
cable (not supplied)
DVD player
Audio Equipment
137
6. Installation and Connections
AUDIO IN
LR
AUDIO OUT
LR
VIDEO OUT
HDMI OUT
S-VIDEO VIDEO
HDMI Output
HDMI
HD MI
HDMI IN
Connecting HDMI Input
YoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourDVDplayer,harddiskplayer,Blu-rayplayer,ornotebooktypePCtothe
HDMIINconnectorofyourprojector.
NOTE:TheHDMIINconnectorsupportsPlug&Play(DDC2B).
Audio cable (not supplied)
HDMI cable (not supplied)
Use High Speed HDMI
®
Cable.
Inputconnector
SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet
Buttonontheremotecontrol
HDMIIN HDMI HDMI
TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:
Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.
Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.
Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.
• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINconnectoroftheprojectortotheDVDplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbe
madesettingsinaccordancewiththeDVDplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[HDMISETTINGS]→[VIDEO
LEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.
• If the HDMI input sound cannot be heard, in the menu select [HDMI SETTINGS] →[AUDIO SELECT]→
[HDMI].
138
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wired LAN
TheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.
TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[APPLICATIONMENU]→
[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page108).
Example of LAN connection
ExampleofwiredLANconnection
LAN
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)
NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLAN
cable.
139
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (NP02LM series)
TheUSBWirelessLANUnitalsoprovidesawirelessLANconnection.TouseawirelessLANconnection,youare
requiredtoassignanIPaddresstotheprojector.
NOTE:
AwirelessLANunitisequippedwiththeprojectorformodelsdistributedinNorthAmericamodels.AnoptionalwirelessLANunit
isavailableformodelsforEurope,Australia,AsiaandothercountriesthanNorthAmerica.
Important:
• IfyouusetheprojectorwiththeUSBWirelessLANUnitintheareawheretheuseofwirelessLANequipmentis
prohibited,removetheUSBWirelessLANUnitfromtheprojector.
• BuytheappropriateUSBWirelessLANUnitforyourcountryorarea.
NOTE:
• ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitashestoshowthattheUSBWirelessLANUnitisworking.
• Yourcomputer’swirelessLANadapter(orunit)mustbecompliedwithWi-Fi(IEEE802.11b/g/n)standard.
Flow of Setting Wireless LAN
Step1: AttachtheUSBWirelessLANUnittotheprojectorifrequired.
Step2: Display[NETWORKSETTINGS]from[APPLICATIONMENU].(→page107)
Step3: Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]andset[EASYCONNECTION],
[PROFILE1],or[PROFILE2].(→page108)
TIP:
AccesstheHTTPserverfunctiontoset[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[SETTINGS]→[WIRELESS]→[EASYCONNECTION],[PRO-
FILE1],[PROFILE2].
140
6. Installation and Connections
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection
(NetworkType→Infrastructure)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless
LAN function
Wired LAN
Wireless access point
USB Wireless LAN Unit
Toenabledirectcommunication(i.e.,peer-to-peer)betweencomputersandprojectors,youneedtoselecttheAd
Hocmode.
UsetheHTTPserverfunctiontomakethesettings.(→page36)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless
LAN function
UsetheHTTPserverfunctiontomakethesettings.(→page36)
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection(NetworkType→AdHoc)
USB Wireless LAN Unit
141
6. Installation and Connections
PrepareaPhillipsscrewdriverbeforehand.
1. PressthePOWERbuttontoturnofftheprojectorandsetit
intostandbycondition,anddisconnectthepowercord.
2. RemovetheUSB(LAN)portcover.
Loosen the screw securing the port cover.
 •Thescrewisnotremovable.
3. SlowlypullouttheUSBWirelessLANUnitintotheUSB(LAN)
port.
Keep the cap for later use.
4. PuttheUSB(LAN)portcoverbackintoplace.
Insert the catch of the USB (LAN) port cover into the groove of the
projector cabinet, and then tighten the screw to secure the port
cover.
ToinstalltheUSBWirelessLANUnit,disconnectthepowercordand
usetheaboveprocedure.
NOTE:
• ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitashestoshowthatWireless
LANUnitisworking.IftheUSBWirelessLANUnitisincorrectlyattached,
theblueLEDwillnotash.
• DonotpressthebuttonontheUSBWirelessLANUnit.Thebuttonwillnot
workwiththismodel.
1
2
Removing and attaching the USB Wireless LAN Unit
NOTE:
• TheUSBWirelessLANUnitmustbeinsertedintotheUSBWirelessLANUnitportinthecorrectdirection.Itcannotbeinserted
inthereversedirection.IftheUSBWirelessLANUnitisinsertedinthereversedirectionwithexcessiveforceapplied,theUSB
portmaybreak.
• BeforetouchingtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,touchametallicobject(suchasadoorknoboraluminumwindowframe)todischarge
thestaticelectricityfromyourbody.
• AlwaysinsertorremovetheUSBWirelessLANunitwhenthemainpoweristurnedoff.Failuretodosomaycauseprojector
malfunctionordamagetotheUSBwirelessLANunit.Iftheprojectorwillnotworkcorrectly,turnofftheprojector,disconnect
thepowercord,andthenconnectitagain.
• DonotinsertotherUSBdevicesintotheUSBWirelessLANunitport.DonotinserttheUSBWirelessLANunitintotheUSB(PC)
port(TypeB).
142
6. Installation and Connections
Attaching the Optional Cable Cover (NP01CV)
Anoptionalcablecover(NP01CV)isavailableforhidingcables.
TheNP01CVcablecoverisdesignedforusewiththeP420X,P350X,andP350W.
CAUTION:
• Besuretotightenthescrewsafterattachingthecablecover.Failuretodosomaycausethecablecovertocome
offandfall,resultingininjuryordamagetothecablecover.
• Donotputbundledcablesinthecablecover.Failuretodosomaydamagethepowercord,resultingare.
Attaching the cable cover
Attachthecablecoverafterinstallingtheprojectorontheceilingandconnectingcables.
Toolneededforattaching:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
1. Aligntwotabsontheoutsideofthecablecoverwithgroovesoftheprojectorandpushthetopend.
1
1
2
Tabs
• Atthesametimetwotabsontheinsideofthecablecoverwillbeengagedintherespondinggroovesofthe
projector.
NOTE:
• Becarefulnottogetcablescaughtinbetweenthecablecoverandtheprojector.
2. Tightenthecablecoverscrews.
• Besuretotightenthescrews.
1
2
Removing the cable cover
1. LoosenthecablecoverscrewsuntilthePhillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondition
143
7. Maintenance
Thissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthelters,thelens,thecabinet,
andtoreplacethelampandthelters.
1 Cleaning the Filters
Theair-lterspongekeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojectorandshouldbefrequentlycleaned.Ifthelter
isdirtyorclogged,yourprojectormayoverheat.
NOTE:Themessageforltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageis
displayed,cleanthelters.Thetimetocleantheltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.
Tocancelthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.
Thetwo-layerlterontheprojectorimprovescoolinganddust-proofcapabilitiescomparedwiththeconventional
models.
Theoutsides(intakeside)oftherstandsecondlayerltersremovedust.
Tocleanthelter,detachthelterunitandtheltercover.
CAUTION
• Beforecleaningthelters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.
Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.
1. Push up the buttonsontheleftandrighttoreleasethe
lterunitandpullitout.
2. Removethelterunitbypullingoutthetab.
3. Removethefourlters.
(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion
filters (large and small).
Filter cover
Filter unit
144
7. Maintenance
(2) Push the left end of each filter and remove the hard two
honeycomb filters (large and small).
 •Thelargeltercannotberemovedbypushingonitsright
end.
4. Useavacuumcleanertovacuumallthedustinside.
Get rid of dust in the accordion filter
NOTE:
• Wheneveryouvacuumthelter,usethesoftbrushattachmentto
vacuum.Thisistoavoiddamagetothelter.
• Donotwashthelterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinlterclog-
ging.
5. Removedustfromthelterunitandtheltercover.
Clean both outside and inside.
6. Attachthefourlterstothelterunit.
(1) Insert the left end of each hard honeycomb filter (large and
small) first and then the right end of each hard honeycomb
filter to the filter unit.
 •Thelargeltercannotbettedifitsrightendisinserted.
(2) Turn the filter unit over.
 •Attachthetwosoftaccordionlters(largeandsmall).Each
accordion filter has a slit on it. Align the slit with each pro-
trusion of the filter unit.
Slit
145
7. Maintenance
7. Putthelterunitbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Makesurethatthelterunitisplacedinthecorrectorienta-
tion.
8. Puttheltercoverbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
Insert two catches of the top side of the filter cover into the
groove of the cabinet, and push the buttons on the left and right
to close the filter cover.
• Pushtheltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.
9. Clearthelterusagehours.
Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the
projector.
From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS].
(→ page 104)
The interval time to clean the filters is set to [OFF] at time of
shipment. When using the projector as it is, you do not clear
the filter usage
146
7. Maintenance
Cleaning the Lens
• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.
• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.
• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.
Cleaning the Cabinet
Turnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.
Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.
• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.
• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuum
cleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.
Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.
• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.
• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourngersoranyhardobjects
• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.
NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproduct
inprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacenishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.
147
7. Maintenance
Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Whenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatorinthecabinetwillblinkredandthemessage“THE
LAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMPANDFILTER.”willappear
(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,replacethelamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformance.After
replacingthelamp,besuretoclearthelamphourmeter.(→page104)
CAUTION
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojector
offandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexceptonelampcoverscrewandtwolamphousingscrews.Youcouldreceive
anelectricshock.
• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.
Keepngerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingngerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcause
anunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.
• Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hours
afterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Ifthishappens,besuretoreplacethelamp.Ifyoucontinuetouse
thelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescattered
inthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishappens,contactyourNEC
dealerforlampreplacement.
*NOTE:Thismessagewillbedisplayedunderthefollowingconditions:
• foroneminuteaftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon
• whenthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed
Toturnoffthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.
Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
• Replacementlamp:
NP16LP(P350X)
NP17LP(P420X/P350W)
Flow of Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Step 1. Replacethelamp
Step 2. Replacethelters(→page150)
Step 3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours(→page104)
148
7. Maintenance
2. Removethelamphousing.
(1)Loosenthetwoscrewssecuringthelamphousinguntilthephillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondi-
tion.
 •Thetwoscrewsarenotremovable.
 •Thereisaninterlockonthiscasetopreventtheriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempttocircumventthis
interlock.
(2)Removethelamphousingbyholdingit.
Interlock
To replace the lamp:
1. Removethelampcover.
(1)Loosenthelampcoverscrew
 •Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.
(2)Pushandslidethelampcoveroff.
CAUTION:
Makesurethatthelamphousingiscool
enoughtobeforeremovingit.
149
7. Maintenance
This completes the lamp replacement.
Go on to the filter replacement.
NOTE:Whenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife,theprojector
cannotturnonandthemenuisnotdisplayed.
Ifthishappens,presstheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.
Whenthelamptimeclockisresettozero,theLAMPindicatorgoesout.
4. Reattachthelampcover.
(1)Slidethelampcoverbackuntilitsnapsintoplace.
(2)Tightenthescrewtosecurethelampcover.
 •Besuretotightenthescrew.
3. Installanewlamphousing.
(1)Insertanewlamphousinguntilthelamphousingispluggedintothesocket.
(2)Pushthetopcenterofthelamphousingtosecureit.
(3)Secureitinplacewiththetwoscrews.
 •Besuretotightenthescrews.
150
7. Maintenance
To replace the filters:
Fourltersarepackagedwiththereplacementlamp.
Honeycomblter(coarsemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheoutsideofthelterunit)
Accordionlter(nemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheinsideofthelterunit)
NOTE:
• Replaceallfourltersatthesametime.
• Beforereplacingthelters,wipeoffdustanddirtfromtheprojectorcabinet.
• Theprojectorisprecisionequipment.Keepoutdustanddirtduringlterreplacement.
• Donotwashthelterswithsoapandwater.Soapandwaterwilldamagetheltermembrane.
• Putltersintoplace.Incorrectattachmentofaltermaycausedustanddirttogetintotheinsideoftheprojector.
Beforereplacingthelters,replacethelamp.(→page148)
1. Pushupthebuttonsontheleftandrighttoreleasethelterunitandpullitout.
2. Removethelterunitbypullingoutthetab.
3. Removethefourlters.
(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion filters (large and small).
Filter cover
Filter unit
151
7. Maintenance
(2) Push the left end of each filter and remove the hard two honeycomb filters (large and small).
 •Thelargeltercannotberemovedbypushingonitsrightend.
4. Removedustfromthelterunitandtheltercover.
Clean both outside and inside.
5. Attachfournewlterstothelterunit.
(1) Insert the left end of each hard honeycomb filter (large and small) first and then the right end of each hard
honeycomb filter to the filter unit.
 •Thelargeltercannotbettedifitsrightendisinserted.
(2) Turn the filter unit over.
 •Attachthetwosoftaccordionlters(largeandsmall).Eachaccordionlterhasaslitonit.Aligntheslitwith
each protrusion of the filter unit.
6. Putthelterunitbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Makesurethatthelterunitisplacedinthecorrectorientation.
7. Puttheltercoverbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
Insert two catches of the top side of the filter cover into the groove of the cabinet, and push the buttons on the left
and right to close the filter cover.
 Pushtheltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.
This completes the filter replacement.
Go on to the clearing lamp and filter hour meters.
To clear the lamp usage hours and the filter usage hours:
1. Placetheprojectorwhereyouuseit.
2. Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.
3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours.
1. From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours.
2. Select [CLEAR FILTER HOURS].and reset the filter usage hours. (→ page 104)
152
8. User Supportware
Installing Software Program
Installation for Windows software
ThesoftwareprogramsexceptImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportWindows7,WindowsVista,andWindows
XP.
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,Win-
dowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindowsXPHomeEditionandWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft
.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlater”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlaterisavailablefromMicrosoft’s
webpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer
• ImageExpressUtilityLitewillbeinstalledtothesystemdriveofyourcomputer.
Ifthemessage“Thereisnotenoughfreespaceondestination”isdisplayed,freeupenoughspace(about100MB)toinstallthe
program.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
153
8. User Supportware
2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
TIP:
Uninstalling a Software Program
Preparation:
Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave
“Administrator”privilege(Windows7andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
• For Windows 7/Windows Vista
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”
The “Programs and Features” window will be displayed.
3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.
4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.
 •Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
• For Windows XP
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.
The Add / Remove Programs window will be displayed.
3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
154
8. User Supportware
Installation for Macintosh software
ImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportsMacOSX.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
2 Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.
3 Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.
4 Double-click“ImageExpressUtility2(Intel).dmg”.
The “Image Express Utility 2” folder will be displayed.
• IfyourMacisPowerPC-based,double-click“ImageExpressUtility2.dmg”.
5 Movethe“ImageExpressUtility2”folderto“Applications”folderusingadrag-and-dropoperation.
TIP:
• Uninstalling a software program
1. Putthe“ImageExpressUtility2”foldertotheTrashicon.
2. PutthecongurationleofImageExpressUtility2totheTrashicon.
• ThecongurationleofImageExpressUtility2islocatedin“/user/yourusername/library/Preferences/jp.co.
nec.nevt. ImageExpressUtility.plist”.
155
8. User Supportware
Using the Computer Cable (VGA) to Operate the Projector
(Virtual Remote Tool)
Usingtheutilitysoftware“VirtualRemoteTool”,VirtualRemotescreen(ortoolbar)canbedisplayedonyourcomputer
screen.
Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviathecomputercable
(VGA),serialcable,orLANconnection.OnlyviaserialorLANconnectionitisalsousedtosendanimagetothe
projectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfrom
changing.
Control Functions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute*,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremote
controloperationonyourPC.
NOTE:
*AudiomutefunctionisnotavailableonM420XV.
VirtualRemotescreen
RemoteControlWindow Toolbar
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.
ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page159)
TIP:
• VirtualRemoteToolcanbeusedwithaLANandaserialconnection.
• ForupdateinformationonVirtualRemoteTool,visitourwebsite:
http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
NOTE:
• When[COMPUTER1]isselectedfromyoursourceselection,theVirtualRemotescreenorthetoolbarwillbedisplayedaswell
asyourcomputerscreen.
• Usethesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)toconnecttheCOMPUTER1INconnectordirectlywiththemonitoroutputconnectorof
thecomputertouseVirtualRemoteTool.
Usingaswitcherorothercablesthanthesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)maycausefailureinsignalcommunication.
VGAcableconnector:
PinNos.12and15arerequiredforDDC/CI.
• VirtualRemoteToolmaynotworkdependingonyourcomputer’sspecicationsandversionofgraphicadaptersordrivers.
• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions:
(OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)
- Filesize:64KBorless
- Imagesize(resolution):Horizontal699dots×vertical499dotsorless
- Numberofcolors:256colorsorless
• ThelogodatathatissentwithVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedatthecenterofthescreen.Itssurroundingwillbepainted
outinthesamecolorasonefor1dotattopleft
TIP:
• Theprojector’sCOMPUTER1INconnectorsupportsDDC/CI(DisplayDataChannelCommandInterface).DDC/CIisastandard
interfaceforbidirectionalcommunicationbetweendisplay/projectorandcomputer.
156
8. User Supportware
Step 1: Install Virtual Remote Tool on the computer
NOTE:
• ToinstallVirtualRemoteTool,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,WindowsVistaand
WindowsXP).
• ExitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallingVirtualRemoteTool.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecom-
pleted.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
157
8. User Supportware
TIP:
Uninstalling Software Program
Preparation:
Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave
“Administrator”privilege(Windows7andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
• For Windows 7/Windows Vista
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”
The “Programs and Features” window will be displayed.
3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.
4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.
 •Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
• For Windows XP
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.
The Add / Remove Programs window will be displayed.
3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
Connect the projector to the computer
1 Usethesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)toconnecttheCOMPUTER1INconnectoroftheprojectordirectly
withthemonitoroutputconnectorofthecomputer.
2 ConnectthesuppliedpowercordtotheACINoftheprojectorandthewalloutlet.
The projector is in the standby condition.
COMPUTER 1 IN
TIP:
• WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthersttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayedtonavigateyourconnections.
ACInput
Supplied computer cable (VGA)
→ To wall outlet
Power cord (supplied)
158
8. User Supportware
Start Virtual Remote Tool
Start using the shortcut icon
• Double-clicktheshortcuticon ontheWindowsDesktop.
Start from the Start menu
• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]
→[VirtualRemoteTool].
When Virtual Remote Tool starts for the first time, “Easy Setup” window will be displayed.
Follow the instructions on the screens
When “Easy Setup” is completed, the Virtual Remote Tool screen will be displayed.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathecomputer
cable(VGA)ornetwork(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
TIP:
• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window.
Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreenatStep6in“EasySetup”.
159
8. User Supportware
Exiting Virtual Remote Tool
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon ontheTaskbar.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click“Exit”.
The Virtual Remote Tool will be closed.
Viewing the help le of Virtual Remote Tool
• Displaying the help le using the taskbar
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2. Click“Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
• Displaying the help le using the Start Menu.
1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and
then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.
The Help screen will be displayed.
160
8. User Supportware
Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector
over a LAN (Image Express Utility Lite)
UsingImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendthecomputer’sscreenimagetotheprojectoroveraUSBcable
orawiredorwirelessLAN.
ThissectionwillshowyouanoutlineabouthowtoconnecttheprojectortoaLANandtouseImageExpressUtility
Lite.FortheoperationofImageExpressUtilityLite,seethehelpofImageExpressUtilityLite.
What you can do with Image Express Utility Lite
• USB Display
• Computer’sscreenimagecanbeprojectedviaaUSBcable,withoutconnectingacomputercable(VGA).
• JustconnectingthecomputerandtheprojectoroveraUSBcablewillmaketheUSBDisplayfunctionavailable
(Plug&Play)evenwithoutinstallingImageExpressUtilityLiteonthecomputer.(→page34)
• Image transmission
• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttotheprojectorviaawiredorwirelessnetworkwithoutacomputercable
(VGA).
• Byusing“EASYCONNECTION”function,thecomplicatednetworksettingscanbesimpliedandthecomputer
willautomaticallyconnecttotheprojector.
• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttouptofourprojectorsatthesametime.
• Geometric Correction Tool (GCT)
See“❹ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolinImageExpressUtilityLite)”.
Step 1: Install Image Express Utility Lite on the computer.
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalltheprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,WindowsVista
andWindowsXP).
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
• ImageExpressUtilityLitewillbeinstalledtothesystemdriveofyourcomputer.
Ifthemessage“Thereisnotenoughfreespaceondestination”isdisplayed,freeupenoughspace(about100MB)toinstallthe
program.
1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
161
8. User Supportware
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7:
1.Click“start”onWindows.
2.Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. TypeyourCD-ROMdrivename(example:“Q:\”)and“LAUNCHER.EXE”in“Name”.(example:Q:\LAUNCH-
ER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
The menu window will be displayed.
2. Clickasoftwareprogramonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
TIP:
•UninstallingImageExpressUtilityLite
TouninstallImageExpressUtilityLite,dothesameproceduresstatedasin“UninstallingVirtualRemoteTool”.Read“VirtualRemote
Tool”as“ImageExpressUtilityLite”(→page157)
Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(standardsforNorthAmerica,optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page139)and“9Application
Menus”(→page105)
Start Image Express Utility Lite.
1. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ImageExpressUtility
Lite”→“ImageExpressUtilityLite”.
Image Express Utility Lite will start.
 Theselectwindowfornetworkconnectionwillbedisplayed
2. SelectNetworkandclick“OK”.
The select window for destination will show a list of connectable projectors.
• Whenconnectingthecomputerdirectlytotheprojectorbyone-to-one,“EasyConnection”isrecommended.
• Whenoneormorenetworksfor“EASYCONNECTION”arefound,the“EasyConnectionSelectionScreen”
windowwillbedisplayed.
• Tocheckforthenetworkavailableforconnectedprojectors,fromthemenu,select[INFO.]→[WIRELESS
LAN]→[SSID].
162
8. User Supportware
3. Selecttheprojectoryouwishtoconnect,andclick“Connect”.
The target selection window will be displayed.
4. Placeacheckmarkforprojectorstobeconnected,andthenclick“Connect”.
• Whenoneormoreprojectorsaredisplayed,fromthemenuontheprojector,select[INFO.]→ [WIRELESS LAN]
→ [IP ADDRESS].
When connecting with the projector is establised, you can operate the control window to control the projector. (→
page 35)
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorthatisturnedoffwillnotbedisplayed
intheselectwindowfordestination
TIP:
Viewing the Help of Image Express Utility Lite
• DisplayingtheHelpleofImageExpressUtilityLitewhileitisrunning.
 Clickthe[?](help)icononthecontrolwindow.
The Help screen will be displayed.
• DisplayingtheHelpleofGCTwhileitisrunning.
 Click“Help(C)”→ “Help” on the Cornerstone Edit screen.
The Help screen will be displayed.
• DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
 Click“Start”→ “All programs” or “Programs” → “NEC Projector User Supportware” → “Image Express Utility Lite”
→ “Image Express Utility Lite Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
163
8. User Supportware
Projecting an Image from an Angle (Geometric Correction Tool
in Image Express Utility Lite)
TheGeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)functionallowsyoutocorrectdistortionofimagesprojectedevenfroman
angle.
What you can do with GCT
• TheGCTfeatureincludesthefollowingthreefunctions
• 4-point Correction:Youcantaprojectedimagewithintheborderofthescreeneasilybyalignthefourcorners
ofanimagetotheonesofthescreen.
• Multi-point Correction:Youcancorrectadistortedimageonthecornerofawallorirregularshapedscreen
byusingmanyseparatedscreenstocorrecttheimageaswellas4-pointCorrection.
• Parameters Correction:Youcancorrectadistortedimagebyusingacombinationoftransformationalrules
preparedinadvance.
Thissectionwillshowanexampleforusewith4-pointCorrection.
Forinformationabout“Multi-pointCorrection”and“ParametersCorrection”,seethehelpleofImageExpress
UtilityLite.(→page162)
• Yourcorrectiondatacanbestoredintheprojectororyourcomputerwhichcanberestoredwhennecessary.
• TheGCTfunctionisavailablewithaUSBcable,wiredorwirelessLANconnection,andvideocable.
Projecting an Image from an Angle (GCT)
ThissectionwillshowanexampleforusewithUSBDisplay(usingaUSBcabletoconnectacomputerandthepro-
jector).
•
TheUSBDisplayfunctionwillautomaticallydisplaythecontrolwindow
• ForavideocableorLANconnection,installandstartImageExpressUtilityLiteinyourcomputerbeforehand.(→
page34)
Preparation:Adjusttheprojectorpositionorthezoomsothattheprojectedimagecancoverthewholescreenarea.
1. Clickthe“ ”(Picture)iconandthenthe“ ”button.
The “4-point Correction” window will be displayed.
2. Clickthe“StartCorrection”buttonandthen“Start4-pointCorrection”button.
A green frame and a mouse pointer ( ) will be displayed.
• Four[•]markswillbeappearedatfourcornersofthegreenframe
164
8. User Supportware
3. Usethemousetoclickthe[ • ]markofwhichcorneryouwishtomove.
The currently selected [ •]markwillturnred.
(In the above example, Windows screens are omitted for clarification.)
4. Dragtheselected[ • ]marktothepointyouwishtocorrectanddropit.
• Whenyouclicksomewherewithintheprojectimagearea,thenearest[•]markwillgotothepositionwhere
the mouse cursor is.
5. RepeatStep3and4tocorrectthedistortionoftheprojectedimage.
6. Aftercompleting,right-clickthemouse.
The green frame and the mouse pointer will disappear from the projected image area. This will complete the cor-
rection.
7. Clickthe“X”(close)buttononthe“4-pointCorrection”window.
 The“4-pointCorrection”windowwilldisappearandthe4-pointcorrectionwilltakeeffect.
8. Clickthe“ ”buttononthecontrolwindowtoexittheGCT.
TIP:
• Afterperformingthe4-pointcorrection,youcansavethe4-pointcorrectiondatatotheprojectorbyclicking“File”→“Writingto
theprojector…”onthe“4-pointCorrection”window.
• SeetheHelpofImageExpressUtilityLiteforoperating“4-pointCorrection”windowandotherfunctionsthanGCT.(→page
162)
165
8. User Supportware
Projecting Images or Videos from the Projector over a LAN
(Image Express Utility 2.0)
What you can do with Image Express Utility 2.0
• UsingImageExpressUtility2.0allowsyoutosendthescreensofyourcomputerstotheprojectorviawired/wire-
lessLAN.
ThedifferencefromImageExpressUtilityLiteisthatprojectedimagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonly
oneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandreceivedbetweentwoormorecomputers.
• High-speed, high-quality image transmissions based on NEC’s original compression algorithm
NEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithmallowshigh-qualityimagestobesentoverthenetworkathighspeed,from
yourcomputertotheprojector.
• Simultaneous projection by multiple projectors
Imagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesame
time.
• “Easy Connection” function for connecting wireless LAN
Byusing“EasyConnection”function*
1
,thecomplicatedsettingofwirelessLANcanbesimplied.
*
1
ThisfunctioncanbeusedwhenWindowsXPisusedastheOSandwhenyouhavea“ComputerAdminis-
trator”privilege.IftheOSisWindows7/WindowsVista,inputoflogonpasswordas“Administrator”maybe
prompted.
166
8. User Supportware
• Projected images can be transferred and saved to computers.
When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesenttothecomputersofalltheparticipants(attendants)
ofa“Meeting”.Thereceivedimagescanbesavedtoyourcomputerwithamemo(textdata)attached.
Attendant
Attendant
Presenter
Attendant
• 1-click switching of presenter
Whenswitchingtoanotherpresenterduringtheconference,theparticipants(attendants)cansimplyclickabutton
toswitchovertothenewpresenter.
• Central management of the projecting computer
UsingtheTrainingModeallowsyoutouseasinglecomputer(Manager)tomanagewhichcomputer(Attendant)
projects.Possibleoperationincludesswitchingprojectingcomputerstoprojectfrom,aswellastemporarilytermi-
natingcommunicationwiththeprojector.
AttendantA
AttendantD
(presenter)
AttendantB AttendantC
Manager
Mr. D,pleasestart
yourpresentation.
NOTE::
TheTrainingModeisnotinstalledviathe“Typical”installationoptionwhenImageExpressUtility2.0isinstalled.
TouseTrainingMode,select“Extension”installationoptionontheinstallselectionscreenthatisdisplayedwhileImageExpress
Utility2.0installationisinprogress,andselect“TrainingMode(Attendant)”or“TrainingMode(Manager)”.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page139)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page105)
167
8. User Supportware
Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2.0
ThissectionexplainsthefollowingthreecasesasexamplesofoperatingImageExpressUtility2.0.
(1)Transferringimagestotheprojector
(2)Holdingaconference
(3)Participatinginaconference
Sending Images to Projector
• Connecting projector
1 TurnonthepowertotheprojectorforwhichLANhasbeenset.
2 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowwillbedisplayed.
 Alistofthenetworkequipmentconnectedtoyourcomputerwillbedisplayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
3 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
 Selectthenetworkdevicedisplaying“EasyConnection”iftheproductLANsettingisfor“EasyConnection.”This
will call up the “Projector List” window.
168
8. User Supportware
4 Check( )theprojectortoconnectandclick[Connect].
 Ifthenameoftheprojectortoconnectisnotonthelistorifitishidden,click[Update].
Click
4
-1
Clic
k
4
-2
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
At this time, the input signal of the projector will automatically change to “NETWORK”.
• Transferring images
Whenyourcomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thescreenofthecomputerisprojectedfromtheprojectorasis.To
makeyourpresentationbyusingaPowerPointle,openthePowerPointleandstartyourpresentation.
169
8. User Supportware
• Stopping or resuming the transmission of images
Thetransmissionofthescreenofthecomputertotheprojectorcanbetemporarilystoppedandthenresumed.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[StopSending].
 Theprojectoricononthetaskbarwillchange( → ).
NOTE:
Evenifthescreenofthecomputerischangedinthisstatus,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectordoesnotchange.
Tomanipulatethescreenthatshouldnotbedisclosed(projectedfromtheprojector),stoptransmission.
3 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
4 Click[StartSending].
 Theprojectoricononthetaskbarwillchange( → ).
The transmission of the screen for the computer will be resumed, and the current screen of the computer will be
projected from the projector.
• End the transmission of images
ExitImageExpressUtility2.0.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[Exit].
170
8. User Supportware
Holding Conferences
• Holding conferences
1 Followsteps1through4in“Connectingprojector”of“SendingImagestoProjector”(→page167).
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
• Disclose a le to the participants of the conference.
NOTE:
Todisclosealetotheparticipants,selectioncanbemadeonlyinfolderunits.
Therefore,afolderonlyhavinglesthatcanbedisclosedtotheparticipantsmustbecreatedinadvance.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Beforeclicking[SendtoPCandProjector],checkthatthereisa“•”markapplied.
3 Clickthe[ImageExpressUtility2.0]buttononthetaskbar.
The presenter window will be opened.
4 Click[SelectFolder].
Click
4
171
8. User Supportware
5 Selectafoldersavingtheletobedisclosedtotheparticipants,andclick[OK].
The file in the selected folder will be displayed in the list of files to transfer.
6 Click[Download].
The file will be shown to the participants.
NOTE:
Whenthecomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thecomputerscreenthatisinofbeingprogressisalsoprojectedfromtheprojec-
tor.Tomanipulateascreenthatshouldnotbeshown(notprojected),temporarilystopthetransmission(→page169).
• Ending conference
1 Click[File]inthepresenterwindow,andclick[Exit].
 Youcanalsoendtheconferencebyclicking[×]attheupperrightofthepresenterwindow.
Participating in Conference
• Participating in conferences
1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowwillbedisplayed.
 Alistofthenetworkequipmentconnectedtoyourcomputerwillbedisplayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
2 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
 Selectthenetworkdevicedisplaying“EasyConnection”iftheproductLANsettingisfor“EasyConnection.”This
will call up the “ Meeting List” window.
172
8. User Supportware
3 ClicktheMeetingNametoparticipate,andclick[Connect].
Click
3
The computer will be connected to the selected conference and the attendant window will be displayed.
If the presenter selects “Send to PC And Projector”, the image projected from the projector is displayed in the at-
tendant window.
173
8. User Supportware
• Saving received images
1 Click[Memo]intheattendantwindow.
A memo pane will be displayed.
Memopane
Click
2
Click
1
2 Click[SaveImage]intheattendantwindow.
The image displayed in the attendant window will be saved.
• Thesavedimageisaddedtothememolistandathumbnailisdisplayed.
• Amemocanbeattachedtothesavedimage.
REFERENCE:
• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
createdfolder.
Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
Inthisfolder,anHTMLlenamed“MeetingRecords”iscreated.
Thesavedimageissavedin“Images”folder.
174
8. User Supportware
• Downloading disclosed le
1 Click[FileTransfer]intheattendantwindow.
The “File Transfer” window will be opened.
Click
1
2 Selectaletodownload,andclick[Download].
Downloading will begin.
The progress of the downloading is displayed at the lower left of the window.
3 Whendownloadingiscomplete,click[File]inthe“FileTransfer”window,andclick[Exit].
The “File Transfer” window will be closed.
REFERENCE:
• If“OpenAfterDownloading”ischecked,theleisopenedbyspeciedWindowsapplicationsoftwareafterdownloadingiscom-
plete.
• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
createdfolder.
Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
175
8. User Supportware
• Changing presenter
Threetypesofsettingsmaybemadetochangethepresenter:“NotApproved”,“Approved”,and“ChangingProhibited”
(thesecanbeselectedonlybythepresenter).
Inthefollowingexample,“NotApproved”isselected.
• Click[BecomeAPresenter]intheattendantwindow.
You will change from a participant to a presenter.
Click
1
• Leaving conference
LeavetheconferenceandexitImageExpressUtility2.0.
• Click[File]intheattendantwindow,andclick[Exit].
 Youcanalsoleavetheconferencebyclicking[×]attheupperrightoftheattendantwindow.
176
8. User Supportware
Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer over a LAN
(Desktop Control Utility 1.0)
UsingDesktopControlUtility1.0allowsyoutoremotelyoperateyourcomputerplacedatadistancefromtheprojector
overanetwork(wiredLANorwirelessLAN).
What you can do with Desktop Control Utility 1.0
• AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnectedtotheprojectortooperatethecomputer.
• Suppose,forexample,aPowerPointletobepresentedinaconferenceissavedtoacomputerinyourofce.
IfthiscomputerisconnectedtotheprojectorintheconferenceroomwithLANwhentheconferenceisheld,the
desktopscreenofthecomputerinyourofce(Windows7/WindowsVista/WindowsXP)canbeprojectedandthe
Power-Pointlecanbepresentedbyoperatingtheprojector.Inotherwordsthecomputerdoesnotneedtobe
broughtintotheconferenceroom.
IMPORTANT:
• YoucanusetheDesktopControlUtility1.0tooperateacomputerlocatedinaseparateroomfromtheprojectoroveranetwork.
Therefore,caremustbeexercisedtopreventanythirdpartyfromviewingthescreenofyourcomputer(importantdocuments),
copyingles,orturningoffthepower.
NECassumesnoliabilityforanylossordamagesarisingfrominformationleakorsystemfailurewhileyouareusingDesktop
ControlUtility1.0.
• ThiswilldisconnectLANconnectionwhenthecomputergoesinthestandbymodewhiletheDesktopControlUtility1.0isbeing
used.
IntheWindows7/WindowsVista,select[ControlPanel]→[HardwareandSound]→[PowerOptions].Set[Changewhenthe
computersleeps]to[Never].
In the Windows XP, click [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Power Options] →[System Standby] →
[Never].
• ThescreensaverfunctionisoffwhileDesktopControlUtility1.0isrunning.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page139)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page105)
177
8. User Supportware
Using the projector to operate your computer’s desktop screen
IMPORTANT:
• IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,disabletheuseraccountcontrolbeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0.
WindowsVistahas“UserAccountControl”functiontoprotectthecomputer.Theuseraccountconrmationwindowmaybe
displayed.
SinceDesktopControlUtility1.0cannottransfertheuseraccountconrmationwindow,thiswindowmakestheoperationunavail-
able.BeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0,itisnecessarytodisabletheuseraccountcontrolofWindows7/WindowsVista.
Afterloggingonwiththeadministratoraccount,followtheprocedurebelowtochangethesetting:
[Change Procedure]
<For Windows 7>
1 Click[ControlPanel]fromtheStartManu.
2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety].
3 Click[UserAccounts].
4 Click[ChangeUserAccountControlsettings].
5 Change[Choosewhentobenotiedaboutchangestoyourcomputer]to[Nevernotify]andclick[OK].
• Ifrestartingisrequested,click[Restartnow].
<For Windows Vista>
1 Click[ControlPanel]fromtheStartMenu.
2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety].
3 Click[UserAccount].
4 Click[Enable/DisableUserAccountControl].
5 Remove the checkmark for [Use User Account Control (UAC) to Help Computer Protection] and click
[OK].
• Ifrebootingisrequested,click[RebootNow].
UponcompletionofDesktopControlUtility,itisrecommendedtoenabletheuseraccountcontrol.
178
8. User Supportware
• Operation on computer
1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[DesktopControlUtility
1.0]→[DesktopControl],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowisdisplayed.
 Thisdisplaysalistofthenetworkdevicesconnectedtothecomputeryouareusing.
2 Selectthenetworkdevicetouseandclick[OK].
The “Startup password settings” window will be displayed.
• IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,theUserAccountControlWindowisdisplayed.Click[OK]orinputthe
administrator password.
ScreenwhenDesktopControlUtility1.0isstartedrsttime
already
Screen if starting password has been set
IMPORTANT:
• Besuretowritedownthestartingpasswordincaseyouforgetit.
• ThestartingpasswordmustbeinputeachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.
• Shouldyouforgetthestartingpassword,reinstalltheDesktopControlUtility1.0.
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
179
8. User Supportware
3 InputthestartingpasswordofDesktopControlUtility1.0,andclick[OK].
The “Current password” window will be displayed.
NOTE:
ThecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordeldvarieseachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.
4 Writedownthecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordeld.
Write down “PMHN” in the screen example of step 3.
5 Click[OK].
 DesktopControlUtility1.0willbestarted.
Move to the room where the projector is installed, with the paper on which you have written down the password in
step 4.
180
8. User Supportware
• Operating the projector (connecting computer)
1 ConnectaUSBmousethatiscommerciallyavailabletotheprojector.
USB
2 Turnonthepowertotheprojector.
Set the LAN setting of the projector in advance.
3 PresstheSOURCEbuttonontheprojectorunit.
The Source list will be displayed.
In case of the remote control, press the NETWORK button.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed,proceedtostep5.
4 PresstheSELECT/buttonstoselect[NETWORK],andthenpresstheENTERbutton.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed.
• TheremainingoperationscanbeperformedusingaUSBmouseconnectedtotheprojector.
181
8. User Supportware
5 Click[DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY].
The “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY menu” screen will be displayed.
6 Click“ENTRY”.
A password input screen will be displayed.
7 Inputthepasswordyouhavewrittendowninstep4of“Operationoncomputer”.
• Clickthe[BS]buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]eldtodeletethecharactertotheleftofthecharacter
insertion point.
8 Afterinputtingthepassword,clickthe buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]eld.
You are returned to the “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY” menu screen.
9 Click[COMPUTERSEARCH].
The “COMPUTER LIST” screen will be displayed.
If the connection destination has not been found as a result of a COMPUTER SEARCH, search for the connection
destinationbyinputtingtheIPaddressofthecomputerattheconnectiondestination,click“InputIPAddress”.
182
8. User Supportware
10Clickthecomputerattheconnectiondestinationandthen[OK].
 Thedesktopscreenofthecomputerattheconnectiondestinationwillbedisplayed.
• Operating the projector (manipulating desktop screen)
ThedisplayeddesktopscreencanbemanipulatedbyusingtheUSBmouseconnectedtotheprojector.IftheEXIT
buttonoftheprojectororremotecontrolispressedwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed,anauxiliaryoperationbar
isdisplayedatthelowerleftofthescreen.
Manipulatetheauxiliaryoperationbarbyusingthebuttonsoftheprojectororremotecontrol.
183
8. User Supportware
<1> <2> <3> <4>
<1> (cut-off icon) �������Disconnects communication with the computer�
<2> (Shift icon) ����������When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, shift lock status is set�
The shift lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed
again�
<3> (Ctrl icon) ������������When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, control lock status is set�
The control lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed
again�
<4> (ESC icon) �����������The same operation as when the [ESC] key of the computer is pressed is performed� This icon is
used, for example, to stop a slideshow of PowerPoint�
• Operating the projector (disconnecting communications)
1 PresstheEXITbuttonwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.
An auxiliary operation bar will be displayed at the lower left of the screen.
2 Movethehighlightto (cut-officon)andpresstheENTERbutton.
Communication will be disconnected and you are returned to the “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY” menu screen.
 Toresumecommunication,click[COMPUTERSEARCH].
After that, follow step 10 on the preceding page.
REFERENCE:
Communicationcanalsobedisconnectedbyclickingtheprojectoricononthetaskbarandthenclicking“Disconnect”whilethe
desktopscreenisdisplayed.
184
8. User Supportware
• Operating the projector (exiting Desktop Control Utility 1.0)
1 Clicktheprojectoricon[ ]onthetaskbarwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.
2 Click[Exit].
 DesktopControlUtility1.0willbeterminated.
3 PresstheEXITbuttonontheprojectorunitorontheremotecontrol.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed.
4 PresstheMENUbuttonontheprojectorunitorontheremotecontrol.
The on-screen menu will be displayed.
5 Selectaninputsourceotherthan[NETWORK].
185
8. User Supportware
Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4)
Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.
Control Functions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotication,event
schedule.
ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4.ForinformationonhowtousePC
ControlUtilityPro4,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4.
TIP:
• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.
Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page139)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page105)
Start PC Control Utility Pro 4
Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→
“PCControlUtilityPro4”.
NOTE:
• FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/
sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthe
scheduler.
[Example]ForWindows7:
Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputer
tosleep”→“Never”.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork
(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
TIP:
Viewing the Help of PC Control Utility Pro 4
• DisplayingtheHelpleofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.
 Click“Help(H)”→ “Help (H) …” of window of PC Control Utility Pro 4 in this order.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
• DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
 Click“Start”→ “All programs” or “Programs” → “NEC Projector User Supportware” → “PC Control Utility Pro 4” →
“PC Control Utility Pro 4 Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
186
8. User Supportware
Converting PowerPoint files to Slides (Viewer PPT Converter
3.0)
UsingViewerPPTConverter3.0allowsyoutoconvertPowerPointlesintoJPEGles.ConvertedJPEGlesand
Indexles(.idx)canbesavedtoaUSBmemory.WhentheUSBmemoryinsertedintotheprojector,theseJPEGles
andIndexles(.idx)canbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwithoutconnectingacomputer.
NOTE:
WhenViewerPPTConverter3.0hasbeeninstalled,oncestartViewerPPTConverter3.0oncewiththeprivilegeusedforinstallation.
ThenexitfromViewerPPTConverter3.0withoutdoinganything.
•Starting
ClickWindow’s[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ViewerPPTConverter3.0]→[ViewerPPT
Converter3.0],inthatorder.
NOTE:
WheninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0ontoacomputerthathasPowerPointinstalled,ViewerPPTConverter3.0isautomatically
registeredasaPower-Pointadd-in.
ItisnecessarytocancelViewerPPTConverter3.0add-inbeforeuninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0.
RefertoViewerPPTConverter3.0Helptounregistertheadd-in.
Converting PowerPoint files and saving them to a USB memory
1. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportofthecomputer.
2. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ViewerPPTConverter
3.0”→“ViewerPPTConverter3.0”.
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will start.
3.Click“Brows...”andselectaPowerPointleyouwishtoconvert,andthenclick“Open”.
4.Click“Next”.
187
8. User Supportware
5. SelecttheUSBmemorydrivefor“CardDrive”andtypein“Indexname”.
Index name must be eight alphanumeric characters or less. 2-byte character and file with a long filename cannot
be used.
6. Click“Export”.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
7. Click“OK”.
Exporting a file will start.
8. Click“OK”.
9. Click“Exit”.
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will exit.
10.RemovetheUSBmemoryfromthecomputer.
NOTE:
• BeforeremovingtheUSBmemoryfromtheUSBportofthecomputer,clickthe“SafetoRemoveHardware”icononthetask-
bar.
188
8. User Supportware
Projecting Your Mac’s Screen Image from the Projector over
a LAN (Image Express Utility 2 for Mac)
UsingImageExpressUtility2forMaccontainedallowsyoutosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojectorovera
network(wiredorwirelessLAN).
ImageExpressUtility2forMacrunsonMacOSX10.2.8orlater.
ItrunsonbothMacOSX(PowerPC)andMacOSX(Intel).
Hereafter,“ImageExpressUtility2forMac”isabbreviatedas“ImageExpressUtility2”.
What you can do with Image Express Utility 2
• ViathenetworkimagesonthescreenofyourMaccanbesenttotheprojectorandprojectedonthescreen.
• Onecomputercansendimagestomorethanoneprojector.
Operating environment
Supported OS
MacOSX10.2.8orlaterrequired
MacOSX10.3.0orlaterrecommended
Processor (CPU)
PowerPCG3600MHzprocessorrequired
PowerPCG4800MHzorhigherrecommended
or
IntelCoreSolo1.5GHzorhigherrequired
Memory
256MBorhigherrequired
Network environment
WiredorwirelessLANrequiredthatsupportsTCP/IP
OnlytheAirPortandAirPortExtremewirelessLANcardsareguaranteedtoworkwithImageExpressUtility2.
“EasyConnection”supportsonlyAirPortandAirPortExtreme.
Supported resolution
VGA(640×480)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
(1024×768-1280×800recommendedforP350W)
Supported screen colors
32thousandsofcolors,16.7millioncolorsrequired
*256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page138),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page139)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page105)
189
8. User Supportware
Using Image Express Utility 2
Connecting to a projector
1 Conrmthattheprojectorhasbeenturnedon.
2 ClicktheAirPortstatus( )ontheMacintoshmenubar,andclick“TurnAirPortOn”.
The AirPort status is changed to “ ” or “ ”.
• AirPortstatustypesandmeanings
...AirPort : Off
...AirPort : On ( in infrastructure connection )
...AirPort : On ( in adhoc connection )
REFERENCE:
When the AirPort status ( / / ) is not displayed on the menu bar:
1 ClickAppleMenu( )and[SystemPreferences...].
The “System Preferences” window will be displayed.
2 Click[Network].
 TheNetworkcongurationwindowwillbedisplayed.
3 Select[AirPort]in[Show].
4 Click[AirPort]tab.
The AirPort configuration item will be displayed.
5 Checkthe“ShowAirPortstatusinmenubar”checkboxatthebottomcongurationitem.
The AirPort status ( / / ) will be displayed on the menu bar.
6 Clickthe[ ]buttonattheupperleftontheNetworkcongurationwindow.
 TheNetworkcongurationwindowwillbeclosed.
190
8. User Supportware
3 Double-clickthe“ImageExpressUtility2”iconinthe“ImageExpressUtility2”folder.
• Attheinitialstart,the“LicenseAgreement”windowisdisplayed.
 Thoroughlyreadtheagreementshownonthescreen,andclick“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”
and the [OK] button.
Next, the “Authenticate” window will be displayed.
4 EntertheadministratornameandpasswordofyourMacintoshcomputer,andclickthe[OK]button.
The [Projector Selection] window will be displayed.
5 Checkthe( )checkboxtotheleftoftheprojectornametoconnectandclick[Connect].
The Macintosh computer and the projector are connected via wireless LAN, and images on the Macintosh screen
are projected from the projector.
191
8. User Supportware
Stopping/Restarting Image Transmission
• Stopping image transmission
1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StopSending].
Image transmission is temporarily stopped.
• Restarting image transmission
1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StartSending].
Image transmission is started again.
Exiting Image Express Utility 2
1 Click[ImageExpressUtility2]onthemenubar,andclick[QuitImageExpressUtility2].
Image Express Utility 2 is exited.
192
9. Appendix
1 Troubleshooting
Thissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off The main power is off
–
Blinking light Blue
0�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on� Wait for a moment�
2�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled�
–
Steady light Blue The projector is turned on�
–
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]
–
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY
MODE]
–
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off
Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
[STANDBY MODE])
–
Blinking light Red
1 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 2�5 sec Off)
Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing correctly�
2 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Temperature error The projector is overheated� Move the projector to
a cooler location�
3 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Power error Power unit is not working properly� Contact your
dealer�
4 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Fan error Fans will not work correctly�
6 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Lamp error Lamp fails to light� Wait a full minute and then turn
on again�
9 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] error Dynamic Contrast function is not working properly�
Contact your dealer�
Orange
1 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 2�5 sec Off)
Network conflict
Both the built-in wired LAN and the wireless LAN can-
not be connected to the same network at the same
time�
To use both built-in wired LAN and wireless LAN at
the same time, connect them to different networks�
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling
down�)
The projector is re-firing�
Wait for a moment�
Steadylight
Green
Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
–
Orange
CONTROL PANEL LOCK is on� You have pressed cabinet button when Control
Panel Lock is on�
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched�
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off Normal
–
Blinking light Red
Lamp has reached its end of life� Lamp replace-
ment message will be displayed�
Replace the lamp�
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit� The projector
will not turn on until the lamp is replaced�
Replace the lamp�
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [AUTO ECO] or [ECO1]
–
Over-Temperature Protection
Ifthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorrisestoohigh,theover-temperatureprotectorwillautomaticallyturnoffthelamp
withtheSTATUSindicatorblinking(2-cycleOnandOff.)
Shouldthishappen,dothefollowing:
• Unplugthepowercordafterthecoolingfansstop.
• Movetheprojectortoacoolerlocationiftheroomwhereyouarepresentingisparticularlytoowarm.
• Cleantheventilationholesiftheyarecloggedwithdust.
• Waitabout60minutesuntiltheinsideoftheprojectorbecomescoolenough.
193
9. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions
(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage192.)
Problem Check These Items
Does not turn on
or shut down
• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol
is on� (→ pages 13, 14)
• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 149)
• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufcientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom
where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�
• Checktoseeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofits
life� If so, replace the lamp� After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used� (→ page 104)
• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.
• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600meters
or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH
ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple
minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 97)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for
some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�
Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER]or[AUTOPOWEROFF]isoff.(→ page 93, 100)
No picture
• UsetheCOMPUTER1,theCOMPUTER2,theVIDEOortheS-VIDEObuttonontheremotecontroltoselectyour
source (Computer, Video or S-Video)� (→ page 16) If there is still no picture, press the button again�
• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.
• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 85)
• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 5)
• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 104)
• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 30)
• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
the power to the notebook PC�
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up�
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver
or power management software�
• Seealsothenext page�
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase,
lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]� (→ page 97)
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 92)
• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 85)
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 17)
• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 22)
Picture is blurred
• Adjustthefocus.(→ page 19)
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 17)
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 130)
• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturnedon.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�
Flicker appears on
screen
• Set[FANMODE]tootherthan[HIGHALTITUDE]modewhenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500
feet/1600 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters and
setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to
[AUTO]� (→ page 97)
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported
by the projector� (→ page 199)
• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 87)
Remote control does
not work
• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 9)
• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.
• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 9)
Indicator is lit or
blinking
• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 192)
Cross color in RGB
mode
• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 24)
• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page 86)
Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.
194
9. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.
BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
thepowertothenotebookPC.
InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbefore
beingpoweredup.
NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,
thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→page102orgotonextstep)
• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.
DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.
WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-
ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon
oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough
externaldisplayselections.
• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer
IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayed
correctly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.Each
notebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.
Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.
• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMacintosh
WhenusingaMacintoshwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)
accordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacintoshforthechangestotakeaffect.
ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacintoshandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitch
onaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitch
tothe13"xedmodeandthenrestartyourMacintosh.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemode
andthenrestarttheMacintoshagain.
NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaPowerBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub
15-pinconnector.
• MirroringonaPowerBook
* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacintoshPowerBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”
isoffonyourPowerBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMacintoshcomputerformirroring.
• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacintoshscreen
Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApple
menuandarrangeicons.
195
9. Appendix
Specifications
Thissectionprovidestechnicalinformationaboutprojector’sperformance.
Model Number P420X/P350X/P350W
Optical
P420X P350X P350W
LCDPanel 0.63inchLCDwithMicroLensArray(AspectRatio4:3) 0.59inchLCDwithMicroLens
Array(AspectRatio16:10)
Resolution*
1
1024×768pixels(XGA) 1280×800pixels(WXGA)
Lens Manualzoomandfocus
ZoomRatio=1.7
F1.7–2.0 f=17.4–29.0mm
LensShift(Vertical) 0-0.5V 0-0.6V
Lamp
265WAC
(195WinECO1)
230WAC
(170WinECO1)
265WAC
(195WinECO1)
LightOutput*
2
*
3
4200lumens 3500lumens 3500lumens
ECO1:75% ECO1:75% ECO1:75%
ContrastRatio*
3
(fullwhite:fullblack)
2000:1
ImageSize(Diagonal) 25–300inches/0.64m–7.6m
ProjectionDistance
(Min.–Max.)
26–543inches/0.65–13.8m 27–573inches/0.69–14.6m
ProjectionAngle 0°–16.5°(wide)/0°–9.8°(tele)
*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.
*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe
[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.
*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2005
Electrical
P420X P350X P350W
Inputs
2×RGB/Component(D-Sub15P),1×HDMITypeA(HDMI
®
Connector)HDCPsupported*
4
,
1×S-Video(DIN4P),1×Video(RCA),1×(L/R)RCAAudio,2×StereoMiniAudio
Outputs 1×RGB(D-Sub15P),1×StereoMiniAudio
PCControl 1×PCControlPort(D-Sub9P)
WiredLANPort 1×RJ-45(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
WirelessLANPort
(Optional)
IEE802.11b/g/n(optionalWirelessLANUnit[NP02LMSeries]required)
USBPort 1×TypeA,1×TypeB
ColorReproduction 10-bitsignalprocessing(1.07billioncolors)(VIEWER,NETWORK:Colors,16.7millioncolors)
CompatibleSignals*
5
Analog:VGA/SVGA/XGA/XGA+/WXGA/WXGA+/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA
480i/480p/576i/576p/720p/1080i/1080p
HDMI:VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/SXGA/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p
VideoBandwidth RGB:80MHz(Max.)
HorizontalResolution 540TVlines:NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60
300TVlines:SECAM
ScanRate Horizontal:15kHzto100kHz(RGB:24kHzorover)
Vertical:50Hzto120Hz(HDMI:50Hzto85Hz)
SyncCompatibility SeparateSync
Built-inSpeaker 10W(monaural)
PowerRequirement 100–240VAC,50/60Hz
InputCurrent 3.9-1.7A 3.5-1.5A 3.9-1.7A
196
9. Appendix
Power
Consump-
tion
ECO
MODE
OFF
(NOR-
MAL)
358W
(100-130V)/
343 W
(200-240V)
311 W
(100-130V)/
302 W
(200-240V)
358W
(100-130V)/
343 W
(200-240V)
ECO1
MODE
271W
(100-130V)/
264W
(200-240V)
239W
(100-130V)/
236W
(200-240V)
271W
(100-130V)/
264W
(200-240V)
STANDBY
(NOR-
MAL)
9W(100-130V/200-240V)
STANDBY
(POWER-
SAVING)
0.2W(100-130V)/0.4W(200-240V)
*4 HDMI
®
(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP
WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology?
HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isa
systemforpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraDigitalVisualInterface(DVI).
IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.
WiththeimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedis-
playedduetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).
*5 Animagewithhigherorlowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution(P420X/P350X:1024×768/P350W:1280×
800)willbedisplayedwithAdvancedAccuBlend.
Mechanical
P420X P350X P350W
Installation
Orientation
Desktop/Front,Desktop/Rear,Ceiling/Front,Ceiling/Rear
Dimensions 15.7"(W)×4.5"(H)×11.1"(D)/398mm(W)×115mm(H)×282mm(D)
(notincludingprotrusions)
Weight 8.6lbs/3.9kg
Environmental
Considerations
OperationalTemperatures:41°to104°F(5°to40°C),
(ECOmodeselectedautomaticallyat95°Fto104°F/35°Cto40°C)
20%to80%humidity(non-condensing)
StorageTemperatures:14°to122°F(-10°to50°C),
20%to80%humidity(non-condensing)
Regulations UL/C-ULApproved(UL60950-1,CSA60950-1)
MeetsDOCCanadaClassBrequirements
MeetsFCCClassBrequirements
MeetsAS/NZSCISPR.22ClassB
MeetsEMCDirective(EN55022,EN55024,EN61000-3-2,EN61000-3-3)
MeetsLowVoltageDirective(EN60950-1,TÜVGSApproved)
Foradditionalinformationvisit:
US:http://www.necdisplay.com/
Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/
Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
Forinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.
Thespecicationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
197
9. Appendix
71.8–76.5
(2.8–3)
398 (15.7)
115 (4.5)
282 (11.1)
11.5 (0.5)
175 (6.9)
24 (0.9)
33.8 (1.3)
130 (5.1)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
134 (5.3)
Cabinet Dimensions
Lens center
Lens center
Holes for ceiling mount
Unit:mm(inch)
198
9. Appendix
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
SignalLevel
Videosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)
Syncsignal:TTLlevel
51423
10
11 12 13 14 15
6978
COMPUTER 1 IN
NOTE:PinNos.12and15arerequiredforDDC/CI.
Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog) YCbCr Signal
1 Red Cr
2 GreenorSynconGreen Y
3 Blue Cb
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 RedGround CrGround
7 GreenGround YGround
8 BlueGround CbGround
9 NoConnection
10 SyncSignalGround
11 NoConnection
12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)
13
HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync
14 VerticalSync
15 DataClock
199
9. Appendix
Compatible Input Signal List
Analog RGB
Signal
Resolution
(dots)
AspectRatio
RefreshRate
(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4:3 60/72/75/85/
iMac
SVGA 800 × 600 4:3 56/60/72/75/85/
iMac
XGA 1024 × 768 *
1
4:3 60/70/75/85/
iMac
XGA+ 1152 × 864 4:3 60/70/75/85
WXGA 1280 × 768 *
2
15:9 60
1280 × 800 *
2
16:10 60
1360 × 768 *
3
16:9 60
1366 × 768 *
3
16:9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4:3 60/75
SXGA 1280 × 1024 5:4 60/75
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4:3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16:10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 *
3
16:9 60
UXGA 1600 × 1200 4:3 60
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16:10 60
HD 1280 × 720 16:9 60
FullHD 1920 × 1080 16:9 60
MAC13" 640 × 480 4:3 67
MAC16" 832 × 624 4:3 75
MAC19" 1024 × 768 4:3 75
MAC21" 1152 × 870 4:3 75
MAC23" 1280 × 1024 5:4 65
Component
Signal Format AspectRatio
RefreshRate
(Hz)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16:9 60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16:9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
Composite Video/S-Video
Signal AspectRatio
RefreshRate
(Hz)
NTSC 4:3 60
PAL 4:3 50
PAL60 4:3 60
SECAM 4:3 50
*1NativeresolutiononXGAmodel(P420X/P350X)
*2NativeresolutiononWXGAmodel(P350W)
*3Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]
isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu.
Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythese
signals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].
NOTE:
• Animagewithhigherorlowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution(P420X/P350X:1024×768/P350W:1280×800)
willbedisplayedwithAdvancedAccuBlend.
• SynconGreenandCompositesyncsignalsarenotsupported.
• Signalsotherthanthosespeciedinthetableabovemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Ifthisshouldhappen,changetherefresh
rateorresolutiononyourPC.RefertoDisplayPropertieshelpsectionofyourPCforprocedures.
HDMI
Signal
Resolution
(dots)
AspectRatio
RefreshRate
(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4:3 60
SVGA 800 × 600 4:3 60
XGA 1024 × 768 *
1
4:3 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 *
2
15:9 60
1280 × 800 *
2
16:10 60
1366 × 768 16:9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4:3 60
SXGA 1280 × 1024 5:4 60
SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4:3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16:10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16:9 60
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16:10 60
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16:9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
200
9. Appendix
NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.
Cable Connection
CommunicationProtocol
Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bps
Data length
��������������������������������������8 bits
Parity
�����������������������������������������������No parity
Stop bit
��������������������������������������������One bit
X on/off
��������������������������������������������None
Communications procedure
�������������Full duplex
NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes
Function Code Data
POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH
INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1AH 22H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H
INPUT SELECT VIEWER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1FH 27H
INPUT SELECT NETWORK 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H
INPUT SELECT USB DISPLAY 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 22H 2AH
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H
SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H
NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.
NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.
NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.
15243
67 98
To GND of PC
To RxD of PC
To TxD of PC
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
201
9. Appendix
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector�
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC�
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�
• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-
naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalong
withoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplay
onoroff.
No image (blue or black background, no display)�
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen�
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available�
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
Troubleshooting Check List
Beforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsoby
referringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblem
moreefciently.
*Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light blue) See also “Status
Indicator (STATUS)”�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Lamp cover is installed correctly�
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement�
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for 1 second�
Shut down during operation�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Lamp cover is installed correctly�
[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
POWER OFF] function)�
[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
function)�
Video and Audio
Image is too dark�
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast�
Image is distorted�
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�
Parts of the image are lost�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
Some pixels are lost�
Image is flickering�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�
Image appears blurry or out of focus�
Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution
on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�
No sound�
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector�
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level�
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models
with the AUDIO OUT connector)�
Other
Remote control does not work�
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the
remote control�
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls�
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu�
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button
for a minimum of 10 seconds�
202
9. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector
Model number:
Serial No�:
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Eco Mode: OFF AUTO ECO
ECO1
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz
Synch polarity H (+) (−)
V (+) (−)
Synch type Separate Composite
Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light Orange Green
Flashing light [ ] cycles
Remote control model number:
Signal cable
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable?
Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Projector
PC
DVD player
Installation environment
Screen size: inch
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Wide angle High contrast
Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Connected directly to wall outlet
Connected to power cord extender or other (the
number of connected equipment______________)
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Video equipment
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
203
9. Appendix
TravelCare Guide
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
Thisproductiseligiblefor“TravelCare”,NEC’suniqueinternationalwarrantyandrepairservice.
FormoreinformationonTravelCareservice,visitourwebsite(inEnglishonly).
http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_support/travel_care.html
©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2010–2012 7N951555
… 217 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Nec P420X at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Nec P420X in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 14,03 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Nec P420X

Nec P420X Quick start guide - English, German - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - German - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Dutch, Danish - 6 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - French - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - French - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Italian - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - Italian - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Polish - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - Polish - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Portuguese - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - Portuguese - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Swedish - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - Swedish - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Turkish - 6 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Spanish - 6 pages

Nec P420X User Manual - Spanish - 215 pages

Nec P420X Quick start guide - Finnish - 6 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info